36c2207c3e00acd775a4ac51394098fd75790e41
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
252 @end ifset
253 @ifset ALPHA
254
255 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
256 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
257 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
258 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
259 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
260 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ARC
263
264 @emph{Target ARC options:}
265 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
266 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
267 @end ifset
268 @ifset ARM
269
270 @emph{Target ARM options:}
271 @c Don't document the deprecated options
272 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
274 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
275 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
276 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
277 [@b{-mthumb}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
280 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
281 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
282 @end ifset
283 @ifset Blackfin
284
285 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
286 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
287 [@b{-mfdpic}]
288 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
289 [@b{-mnopic}]
290 @end ifset
291 @ifset CRIS
292
293 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
294 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
295 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
296 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
297 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
298 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
299 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset D10V
302
303 @emph{Target D10V options:}
304 [@b{-O}]
305 @end ifset
306 @ifset D30V
307
308 @emph{Target D30V options:}
309 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset EPIPHANY
312
313 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
314 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset H8
317
318 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
319 [-h-tick-hex]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset HPPA
322 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
323 @end ifset
324 @ifset I80386
325
326 @emph{Target i386 options:}
327 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
328 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
329 @end ifset
330 @ifset I960
331
332 @emph{Target i960 options:}
333 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
334 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
335 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
336 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset IA64
339
340 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
341 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
342 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
343 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
344 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
345 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
346 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
347 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
348 @end ifset
349 @ifset IP2K
350
351 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
352 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
353 @end ifset
354 @ifset M32C
355
356 @emph{Target M32C options:}
357 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset M32R
360
361 @emph{Target M32R options:}
362 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
363 @b{--W[n]p}]
364 @end ifset
365 @ifset M680X0
366
367 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
368 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
369 @end ifset
370 @ifset M68HC11
371
372 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
373 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
374 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
375 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
376 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
377 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
378 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset MCORE
381
382 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
383 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
384 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
385 @end ifset
386 @ifset METAG
387
388 @emph{Target Meta options:}
389 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
390 @end ifset
391 @ifset MICROBLAZE
392 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
393 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
394 @end ifset
395 @ifset MIPS
396
397 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
398 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
399 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
400 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
401 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
402 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
403 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
404 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
405 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
406 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
407 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
408 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
409 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
410 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
411 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
412 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
413 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
414 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
415 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
416 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
417 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
418 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
419 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
420 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
421 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
422 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
423 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
424 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
425 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
426 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
427 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
428 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset MMIX
431
432 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
433 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
434 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
435 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
436 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
437 @end ifset
438 @ifset NIOSII
439
440 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
441 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
442 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
443 @end ifset
444 @ifset NDS32
445
446 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
447 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
448 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
449 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
450 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
451 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
452 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
453 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
454 [@b{-mb2bb}]
455 @end ifset
456 @ifset PDP11
457
458 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
459 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
460 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
461 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
462 @end ifset
463 @ifset PJ
464
465 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
466 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
467 @end ifset
468 @ifset PPC
469
470 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
471 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
472 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
473 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
474 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
475 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
476 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
477 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
478 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
479 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
480 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
481 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
482 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
483 @end ifset
484 @ifset RL78
485
486 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
487 [@b{-mg10}]
488 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
489 @end ifset
490 @ifset RX
491
492 @emph{Target RX options:}
493 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
494 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
495 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
496 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
497 [@b{-mpid}]
498 [@b{-mrelax}]
499 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
500 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
501 @end ifset
502 @ifset S390
503
504 @emph{Target s390 options:}
505 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
506 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
507 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset SCORE
510
511 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
512 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
513 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
514 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
515 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
516 @end ifset
517 @ifset SPARC
518
519 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
520 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
521 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
522 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
523 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
524 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
525 @end ifset
526 @ifset TIC54X
527
528 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
529 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
530 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset TIC6X
533
534 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
535 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
536 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
537 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
538 @end ifset
539 @ifset TILEGX
540
541 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
542 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
543 @end ifset
544 @ifset TILEPRO
545 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset VISIUM
548
549 @emph{Target Visium options:}
550 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
551 @end ifset
552 @ifset XTENSA
553
554 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
555 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
556 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
557 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
558 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
559 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
560 @end ifset
561 @ifset Z80
562
563 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
564 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
565 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
566 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
567 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
568 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
569 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
570 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
571 @end ifset
572 @ifset Z8000
573
574 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
575 @end ifset
576
577 @c man end
578 @end smallexample
579
580 @c man begin OPTIONS
581
582 @table @gcctabopt
583 @include at-file.texi
584
585 @item -a[cdghlmns]
586 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
587
588 @table @gcctabopt
589 @item -ac
590 omit false conditionals
591
592 @item -ad
593 omit debugging directives
594
595 @item -ag
596 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
597
598 @item -ah
599 include high-level source
600
601 @item -al
602 include assembly
603
604 @item -am
605 include macro expansions
606
607 @item -an
608 omit forms processing
609
610 @item -as
611 include symbols
612
613 @item =file
614 set the name of the listing file
615 @end table
616
617 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
618 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
619 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
620
621 @item --alternate
622 Begin in alternate macro mode.
623 @ifclear man
624 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
625 @end ifclear
626
627 @item --compress-debug-sections
628 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
629 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
630 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
631
632 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
633 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
634
635 @item -D
636 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
637 other assemblers.
638
639 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
640 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
641 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
642
643 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
644 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
645 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
646 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
647 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
648 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
649
650 @item -f
651 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
652 compiler output).
653
654 @item -g
655 @itemx --gen-debug
656 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
657 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
658 ECOFF or DWARF2.
659
660 @item --gstabs
661 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
662 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
663
664 @item --gstabs+
665 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
666 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
667 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
668 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
669 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
670
671 @item --gdwarf-2
672 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
673 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
674 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
675
676 @item --gdwarf-sections
677 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
678 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
679 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
680 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
681 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
682 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
683 suffix.
684
685 @item --size-check=error
686 @itemx --size-check=warning
687 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
688
689 @item --help
690 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
691
692 @item --target-help
693 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
694
695 @item -I @var{dir}
696 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
697
698 @item -J
699 Don't warn about signed overflow.
700
701 @item -K
702 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
703 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
704 @end ifclear
705 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
706 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
707 @end ifset
708
709 @item -L
710 @itemx --keep-locals
711 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
712 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
713 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
714 @ifclear man
715 @xref{Symbol Names}.
716 @end ifclear
717
718 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
719 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
720 listing to @var{number}.
721
722 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
723 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
724 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
725
726 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
727 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
728 @var{number} bytes.
729
730 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
731 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
732 to @var{number} + 1.
733
734 @item -o @var{objfile}
735 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
736
737 @item -R
738 Fold the data section into the text section.
739
740 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
741 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
742 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
743 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
744 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
745 requirements at the expense of speed.
746
747 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
748 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
749 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
750 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
751
752 @item --statistics
753 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
754 assembly.
755
756 @item --strip-local-absolute
757 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
758
759 @item -v
760 @itemx -version
761 Print the @command{as} version.
762
763 @item --version
764 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
765
766 @item -W
767 @itemx --no-warn
768 Suppress warning messages.
769
770 @item --fatal-warnings
771 Treat warnings as errors.
772
773 @item --warn
774 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
775
776 @item -w
777 Ignored.
778
779 @item -x
780 Ignored.
781
782 @item -Z
783 Generate an object file even after errors.
784
785 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
786 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
787
788 @end table
789 @c man end
790
791 @ifset AARCH64
792
793 @ifclear man
794 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
795 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
796 @end ifclear
797
798 @ifset man
799 @c man begin OPTIONS
800 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
801 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
802 @c man end
803 @c man begin INCLUDE
804 @include c-aarch64.texi
805 @c ended inside the included file
806 @end ifset
807
808 @end ifset
809
810 @ifset ALPHA
811
812 @ifclear man
813 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
814 for an Alpha processor.
815 @end ifclear
816
817 @ifset man
818 @c man begin OPTIONS
819 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
820 processor.
821 @c man end
822 @c man begin INCLUDE
823 @include c-alpha.texi
824 @c ended inside the included file
825 @end ifset
826
827 @end ifset
828
829 @c man begin OPTIONS
830 @ifset ARC
831 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
832 an ARC processor.
833
834 @table @gcctabopt
835 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
836 This option selects the core processor variant.
837 @item -EB | -EL
838 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
839 @end table
840 @end ifset
841
842 @ifset ARM
843 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
844 processor family.
845
846 @table @gcctabopt
847 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
848 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
849 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
850 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
851 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
852 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
853 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
854 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
855 @item -mthumb
856 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
857 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
858 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
859 @item -EB | -EL
860 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
861 @item -mthumb-interwork
862 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
863 ARM code in mind.
864 @item -mccs
865 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
866 @item -k
867 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
868 @end table
869 @end ifset
870 @c man end
871
872 @ifset Blackfin
873
874 @ifclear man
875 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
876 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
877 @end ifclear
878
879 @ifset man
880 @c man begin OPTIONS
881 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
882 the Blackfin processor family.
883 @c man end
884 @c man begin INCLUDE
885 @include c-bfin.texi
886 @c ended inside the included file
887 @end ifset
888
889 @end ifset
890
891 @c man begin OPTIONS
892 @ifset CRIS
893 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
894 @end ifset
895
896 @ifset D10V
897 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
898 a D10V processor.
899 @table @gcctabopt
900 @cindex D10V optimization
901 @cindex optimization, D10V
902 @item -O
903 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
904 @end table
905 @end ifset
906
907 @ifset D30V
908 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
909 processor.
910 @table @gcctabopt
911 @cindex D30V optimization
912 @cindex optimization, D30V
913 @item -O
914 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
915
916 @cindex D30V nops
917 @item -n
918 Warn when nops are generated.
919
920 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
921 @item -N
922 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
923 @end table
924 @end ifset
925 @c man end
926
927 @ifset EPIPHANY
928 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
929 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
930
931 @ifclear man
932 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
933 configured for an Epiphany processor.
934 @end ifclear
935
936 @ifset man
937 @c man begin OPTIONS
938 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
939 an Epiphany processor.
940 @c man end
941 @c man begin INCLUDE
942 @include c-epiphany.texi
943 @c ended inside the included file
944 @end ifset
945
946 @end ifset
947
948 @ifset H8300
949
950 @ifclear man
951 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
952 for an H8/300 processor.
953 @end ifclear
954
955 @ifset man
956 @c man begin OPTIONS
957 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
958 processor.
959 @c man end
960 @c man begin INCLUDE
961 @include c-h8300.texi
962 @c ended inside the included file
963 @end ifset
964
965 @end ifset
966
967 @ifset I80386
968
969 @ifclear man
970 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
971 configured for an i386 processor.
972 @end ifclear
973
974 @ifset man
975 @c man begin OPTIONS
976 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
977 an i386 processor.
978 @c man end
979 @c man begin INCLUDE
980 @include c-i386.texi
981 @c ended inside the included file
982 @end ifset
983
984 @end ifset
985
986 @c man begin OPTIONS
987 @ifset I960
988 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
989 Intel 80960 processor.
990
991 @table @gcctabopt
992 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
993 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
994
995 @item -b
996 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
997
998 @item -no-relax
999 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1000 error if necessary.
1001
1002 @end table
1003 @end ifset
1004
1005 @ifset IP2K
1006 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1007 Ubicom IP2K series.
1008
1009 @table @gcctabopt
1010
1011 @item -mip2022ext
1012 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1013
1014 @item -mip2022
1015 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1016 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1017
1018 @end table
1019 @end ifset
1020
1021 @ifset M32C
1022 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1023 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1024
1025 @table @gcctabopt
1026
1027 @item -m32c
1028 Assemble M32C instructions.
1029
1030 @item -m16c
1031 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1032
1033 @item -relax
1034 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1035
1036 @item -h-tick-hex
1037 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1038
1039 @end table
1040 @end ifset
1041
1042 @ifset M32R
1043 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1044 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1045
1046 @table @gcctabopt
1047
1048 @item --m32rx
1049 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1050 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1051
1052 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1053 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1054 encountered.
1055
1056 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1057 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1058 encountered.
1059
1060 @end table
1061 @end ifset
1062
1063 @ifset M680X0
1064 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1065 Motorola 68000 series.
1066
1067 @table @gcctabopt
1068
1069 @item -l
1070 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1071
1072 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1073 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1074 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1075 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1076 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1077
1078 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1079 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1080 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1081 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1082 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1083 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1084
1085 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1086 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1087 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1088
1089 @end table
1090 @end ifset
1091
1092 @ifset NIOSII
1093
1094 @ifclear man
1095 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1096 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1097 @end ifclear
1098
1099 @ifset man
1100 @c man begin OPTIONS
1101 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1102 Altera Nios II processor.
1103 @c man end
1104 @c man begin INCLUDE
1105 @include c-nios2.texi
1106 @c ended inside the included file
1107 @end ifset
1108 @end ifset
1109
1110 @ifset PDP11
1111
1112 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1113 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1114
1115 @table @gcctabopt
1116 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1117 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1118 default is @option{-mpic}.
1119
1120 @item -mall
1121 @itemx -mall-extensions
1122 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1123
1124 @item -mno-extensions
1125 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1126
1127 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1128 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1129
1130 @item -m@var{cpu}
1131 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1132 disable all other extensions.
1133
1134 @item -m@var{machine}
1135 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1136 model, and disable all other extensions.
1137 @end table
1138
1139 @end ifset
1140
1141 @ifset PJ
1142 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1143 a picoJava processor.
1144
1145 @table @gcctabopt
1146
1147 @cindex PJ endianness
1148 @cindex endianness, PJ
1149 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1150 @item -mb
1151 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1152
1153 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1154 @item -ml
1155 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1156
1157 @end table
1158 @end ifset
1159
1160 @ifset M68HC11
1161 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1162 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1163
1164 @table @gcctabopt
1165
1166 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1167 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1168 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1169
1170 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1171 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1172 XGATE address space.
1173
1174 @item -mshort
1175 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1176
1177 @item -mlong
1178 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1179
1180 @item -mshort-double
1181 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1182
1183 @item -mlong-double
1184 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1185
1186 @item --force-long-branches
1187 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1188 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1189 sub routine.
1190
1191 @item -S | --short-branches
1192 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1193 when the offset is out of range.
1194
1195 @item --strict-direct-mode
1196 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1197 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1198
1199 @item --print-insn-syntax
1200 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1201
1202 @item --print-opcodes
1203 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1204
1205 @item --generate-example
1206 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1207 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1208
1209 @end table
1210 @end ifset
1211
1212 @ifset SPARC
1213 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1214 for the SPARC architecture:
1215
1216 @table @gcctabopt
1217 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1218 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1219 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1220
1221 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1222 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1223
1224 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1225 UltraSPARC extensions.
1226
1227 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1228 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1229 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1230
1231 @item -bump
1232 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1233 @end table
1234 @end ifset
1235
1236 @ifset TIC54X
1237 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1238 architecture.
1239
1240 @table @gcctabopt
1241 @item -mfar-mode
1242 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1243 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1244 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1245 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1246 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1247 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1248 behaviour in the shell.
1249 @end table
1250 @end ifset
1251
1252 @ifset MIPS
1253 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1254 a MIPS processor.
1255
1256 @table @gcctabopt
1257 @item -G @var{num}
1258 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1259 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1260 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1261
1262 @cindex MIPS endianness
1263 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1264 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1265 @item -EB
1266 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1267
1268 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1269 @item -EL
1270 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1271
1272 @cindex MIPS ISA
1273 @item -mips1
1274 @itemx -mips2
1275 @itemx -mips3
1276 @itemx -mips4
1277 @itemx -mips5
1278 @itemx -mips32
1279 @itemx -mips32r2
1280 @itemx -mips32r3
1281 @itemx -mips32r5
1282 @itemx -mips32r6
1283 @itemx -mips64
1284 @itemx -mips64r2
1285 @itemx -mips64r3
1286 @itemx -mips64r5
1287 @itemx -mips64r6
1288 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1289 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1290 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1291 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1292 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1293 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1294 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1295 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1296 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1297 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1298
1299 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1300 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1301
1302 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1303 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1304
1305 @item -mfix7000
1306 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1307 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1308 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1309
1310 @item -mfix-rm7000
1311 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1312 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1313 followed by a load instruction.
1314
1315 @item -mdebug
1316 @itemx -no-mdebug
1317 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1318 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1319
1320 @item -mpdr
1321 @itemx -mno-pdr
1322 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1323
1324 @item -mgp32
1325 @itemx -mfp32
1326 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1327 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1328 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1329 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1330
1331 @item -mgp64
1332 @itemx -mfp64
1333 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1334 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1335 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1336 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1337
1338 @item -mfpxx
1339 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1340 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1341 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1342 32 or 64 bits wide.
1343
1344 @item -modd-spreg
1345 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1346 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1347 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1348 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1349
1350 @item -mips16
1351 @itemx -no-mips16
1352 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1353 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1354 turns off this option.
1355
1356 @item -mmicromips
1357 @itemx -mno-micromips
1358 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1359 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1360 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1361 at the start of the assembly file.
1362
1363 @item -msmartmips
1364 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1365 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1366 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1367 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1368
1369 @item -mips3d
1370 @itemx -no-mips3d
1371 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1372 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1373 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1374
1375 @item -mdmx
1376 @itemx -no-mdmx
1377 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1378 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1379 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1380
1381 @item -mdsp
1382 @itemx -mno-dsp
1383 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1384 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1385 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1386
1387 @item -mdspr2
1388 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1389 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1390 This option implies -mdsp.
1391 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1392 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1393
1394 @item -mmsa
1395 @itemx -mno-msa
1396 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1397 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1398 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1399
1400 @item -mxpa
1401 @itemx -mno-xpa
1402 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1403 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1404 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1405
1406 @item -mmt
1407 @itemx -mno-mt
1408 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1409 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1410 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1411
1412 @item -mmcu
1413 @itemx -mno-mcu
1414 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1415 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1416 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1417
1418 @item -minsn32
1419 @itemx -mno-insn32
1420 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1421 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1422 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1423 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1424 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1425 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1426 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1427
1428 @item --construct-floats
1429 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1430 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1431 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1432 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1433 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1434 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1435
1436 @item --relax-branch
1437 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1438 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1439 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1440 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1441
1442 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1443 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1444 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1445
1446 @cindex emulation
1447 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1448 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1449 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1450 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1451 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1452
1453 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1454 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1455 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1456 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1457 preferred options instead.
1458
1459 @item -nocpp
1460 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1461 the native tools.
1462
1463 @item --trap
1464 @itemx --no-trap
1465 @itemx --break
1466 @itemx --no-break
1467 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1468 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1469 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1470 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1471 break exception.
1472
1473 @item -n
1474 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1475 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1476 @end table
1477 @end ifset
1478
1479 @ifset MCORE
1480 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1481 an MCore processor.
1482
1483 @table @gcctabopt
1484 @item -jsri2bsr
1485 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1486 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1487 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1488
1489 @item -sifilter
1490 @itemx -nosifilter
1491 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1492 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1493
1494 @item -relax
1495 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1496
1497 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1498 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1499 can be assembled.
1500
1501 @item -EB
1502 Assemble for a big endian target.
1503
1504 @item -EL
1505 Assemble for a little endian target.
1506
1507 @end table
1508 @end ifset
1509 @c man end
1510
1511 @ifset METAG
1512
1513 @ifclear man
1514 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1515 for a Meta processor.
1516 @end ifclear
1517
1518 @ifset man
1519 @c man begin OPTIONS
1520 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1521 Meta processor.
1522 @c man end
1523 @c man begin INCLUDE
1524 @include c-metag.texi
1525 @c ended inside the included file
1526 @end ifset
1527
1528 @end ifset
1529
1530 @c man begin OPTIONS
1531 @ifset MMIX
1532 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1533 @end ifset
1534
1535 @ifset NDS32
1536
1537 @ifclear man
1538 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1539 for a NDS32 processor.
1540 @end ifclear
1541 @c ended inside the included file
1542 @end ifset
1543
1544 @ifset man
1545 @c man begin OPTIONS
1546 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1547 NDS32 processor.
1548 @c man end
1549 @c man begin INCLUDE
1550 @include c-nds32.texi
1551 @c ended inside the included file
1552 @end ifset
1553
1554 @c man end
1555 @ifset PPC
1556
1557 @ifclear man
1558 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1559 for a PowerPC processor.
1560 @end ifclear
1561
1562 @ifset man
1563 @c man begin OPTIONS
1564 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1565 PowerPC processor.
1566 @c man end
1567 @c man begin INCLUDE
1568 @include c-ppc.texi
1569 @c ended inside the included file
1570 @end ifset
1571
1572 @end ifset
1573
1574 @c man begin OPTIONS
1575 @ifset RX
1576 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1577 @end ifset
1578
1579 @ifset S390
1580 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1581 processor family.
1582
1583 @table @gcctabopt
1584 @item -m31
1585 @itemx -m64
1586 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1587 @item -mesa
1588 @item -mzarch
1589 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1590 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1591 @item -march=@var{processor}
1592 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1593 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1594 @samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1595 @item -mregnames
1596 @itemx -mno-regnames
1597 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1598 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1599 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1600 but evaluates to zero.
1601 @end table
1602 @end ifset
1603 @c man end
1604
1605 @ifset TIC6X
1606
1607 @ifclear man
1608 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1609 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1610 @end ifclear
1611
1612 @ifset man
1613 @c man begin OPTIONS
1614 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1615 TMS320C6000 processor.
1616 @c man end
1617 @c man begin INCLUDE
1618 @include c-tic6x.texi
1619 @c ended inside the included file
1620 @end ifset
1621
1622 @end ifset
1623
1624 @ifset TILEGX
1625
1626 @ifclear man
1627 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1628 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1629 @end ifclear
1630
1631 @ifset man
1632 @c man begin OPTIONS
1633 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1634 processor.
1635 @c man end
1636 @c man begin INCLUDE
1637 @include c-tilegx.texi
1638 @c ended inside the included file
1639 @end ifset
1640
1641 @end ifset
1642
1643 @ifset VISIUM
1644
1645 @ifclear man
1646 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1647 for a Visium processor.
1648 @end ifclear
1649
1650 @ifset man
1651 @c man begin OPTIONS
1652 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1653 processor.
1654 @c man end
1655 @c man begin INCLUDE
1656 @include c-visium.texi
1657 @c ended inside the included file
1658 @end ifset
1659
1660 @end ifset
1661
1662 @ifset XTENSA
1663
1664 @ifclear man
1665 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1666 for an Xtensa processor.
1667 @end ifclear
1668
1669 @ifset man
1670 @c man begin OPTIONS
1671 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1672 Xtensa processor.
1673 @c man end
1674 @c man begin INCLUDE
1675 @include c-xtensa.texi
1676 @c ended inside the included file
1677 @end ifset
1678
1679 @end ifset
1680
1681 @c man begin OPTIONS
1682
1683 @ifset Z80
1684 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1685 a Z80 family processor.
1686 @table @gcctabopt
1687 @item -z80
1688 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1689 @item -r800
1690 Assemble for R800 processor.
1691 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1692 @itemx -Wnud
1693 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1694 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1695 @itemx -Wnup
1696 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1697 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1698 @itemx -Wud
1699 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1700 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1701 @itemx -Wup
1702 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1703 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1704 @itemx -Fud
1705 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1706 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1707 @itemx -Fup
1708 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1709 @end table
1710 @end ifset
1711
1712 @c man end
1713
1714 @menu
1715 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1716 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1717 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1718 * Command Line:: Command Line
1719 * Input Files:: Input Files
1720 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1721 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1722 @end menu
1723
1724 @node Manual
1725 @section Structure of this Manual
1726
1727 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1728 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1729 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1730 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1731 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1732
1733 @ifclear GENERIC
1734 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1735 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1736 @end ifclear
1737 @ifset GENERIC
1738 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1739 various flavors of the assembler.
1740 @end ifset
1741
1742 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1743 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1744 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1745 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1746 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1747 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1748 particular architecture.
1749 @ifset GENERIC
1750 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1751 machine architecture manual for this information.
1752 @end ifset
1753 @ifclear GENERIC
1754 @ifset H8/300
1755 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1756 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1757 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1758 @end ifset
1759 @ifset SH
1760 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1761 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1762 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1763 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1764 @end ifset
1765 @ifset Z8000
1766 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1767 @end ifset
1768 @end ifclear
1769
1770 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1771 @ignore
1772 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1773 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1774 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1775 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1776 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1777 qualification.
1778
1779 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1780 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1781 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1782 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1783 @end ignore
1784
1785 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1786 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1787 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1788 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1789 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1790 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1791 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1792 @c directives).
1793
1794 @node GNU Assembler
1795 @section The GNU Assembler
1796
1797 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1798
1799 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1800 @ifclear GENERIC
1801 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1802 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1803 @end ifclear
1804 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1805 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1806 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1807 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1808 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1809
1810 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1811 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1812 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1813 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1814 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1815 machine would assemble.
1816 @ifset VAX
1817 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1818 @end ifset
1819 @ifset M680X0
1820 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1821 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1822 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1823 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1824 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1825 @end ifset
1826
1827 @c man end
1828
1829 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1830 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1831 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1832
1833 @node Object Formats
1834 @section Object File Formats
1835
1836 @cindex object file format
1837 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1838 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1839 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1840 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1841 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1842 @ifclear GENERIC
1843 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1844 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1845 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1846 @end ifclear
1847 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1848 @ifset I960
1849 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1850 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1851 @end ifset
1852 @ifset HPPA
1853 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1854 SOM or ELF format object files.
1855 @end ifset
1856 @end ifclear
1857
1858 @node Command Line
1859 @section Command Line
1860
1861 @cindex command line conventions
1862
1863 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1864 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1865 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1866 significant.
1867
1868 @cindex standard input, as input file
1869 @kindex --
1870 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1871 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1872
1873 @cindex options, command line
1874 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1875 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1876 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1877 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1878 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1879
1880 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1881 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1882 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1883 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1884
1885 @smallexample
1886 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1887 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1888 @end smallexample
1889
1890 @node Input Files
1891 @section Input Files
1892
1893 @cindex input
1894 @cindex source program
1895 @cindex files, input
1896 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1897 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1898 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1899 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1900
1901 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1902 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1903 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1904 order specified.
1905
1906 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1907 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1908 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1909 (The standard input is also a file.)
1910
1911 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1912 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1913 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1914 is taken to be an input file name.
1915
1916 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1917 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1918 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1919 to assemble.
1920
1921 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1922 in your command line.
1923
1924 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1925 file.
1926
1927 @c man end
1928
1929 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1930
1931 @cindex input file linenumbers
1932 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1933 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1934 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1935 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1936 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1937
1938 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1939 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1940
1941 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1942 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1943 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1944 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1945 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1946 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1947
1948 @node Object
1949 @section Output (Object) File
1950
1951 @cindex object file
1952 @cindex output file
1953 @kindex a.out
1954 @kindex .o
1955 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1956 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1957 is the object file. Its default name is
1958 @ifclear BOUT
1959 @code{a.out}.
1960 @end ifclear
1961 @ifset BOUT
1962 @ifset GENERIC
1963 @code{a.out}, or
1964 @end ifset
1965 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1966 @end ifset
1967 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1968 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1969 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1970 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1971 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1972
1973 @cindex linker
1974 @kindex ld
1975 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1976 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1977 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1978 information for the debugger.
1979
1980 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1981 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1982
1983 @node Errors
1984 @section Error and Warning Messages
1985
1986 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1987
1988 @cindex error messages
1989 @cindex warning messages
1990 @cindex messages from assembler
1991 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1992 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1993 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1994 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1995 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1996
1997 @c man end
1998
1999 @cindex format of warning messages
2000 Warning messages have the format
2001
2002 @smallexample
2003 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2004 @end smallexample
2005
2006 @noindent
2007 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
2008 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
2009 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
2010 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
2011 @ifset GENERIC
2012 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2013 @end ifset
2014 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
2015 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
2016 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
2017 tradition).
2018
2019 @cindex format of error messages
2020 Error messages have the format
2021 @smallexample
2022 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2023 @end smallexample
2024 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2025 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2026 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2027
2028 @node Invoking
2029 @chapter Command-Line Options
2030
2031 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2032 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2033 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2034 for options specific
2035 @ifclear GENERIC
2036 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2037 @end ifclear
2038 @ifset GENERIC
2039 to particular machine architectures.
2040 @end ifset
2041
2042 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2043
2044 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2045 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2046 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2047 by commas. For example:
2048
2049 @smallexample
2050 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2051 @end smallexample
2052
2053 @noindent
2054 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2055 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2056 local symbols in the symbol table).
2057
2058 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2059 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2060 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2061 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2062 assembler.)
2063
2064 @c man end
2065
2066 @menu
2067 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2068 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2069 * D:: -D for compatibility
2070 * f:: -f to work faster
2071 * I:: -I for .include search path
2072 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2073 * K:: -K for compatibility
2074 @end ifclear
2075 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2076 * K:: -K for difference tables
2077 @end ifset
2078
2079 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2080 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2081 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2082 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2083 * o:: -o to name the object file
2084 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2085 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2086 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2087 * v:: -v to announce version
2088 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2089 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2090 @end menu
2091
2092 @node a
2093 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2094
2095 @kindex -a
2096 @kindex -ac
2097 @kindex -ad
2098 @kindex -ag
2099 @kindex -ah
2100 @kindex -al
2101 @kindex -an
2102 @kindex -as
2103 @cindex listings, enabling
2104 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2105
2106 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2107 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2108 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2109 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2110 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2111 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2112 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2113 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2114 also.
2115
2116 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2117 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2118
2119 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2120 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2121 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2122 omitted from the listing.
2123
2124 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2125 listing.
2126
2127 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2128 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2129 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2130 @code{.sbttl}.
2131 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2132 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2133 listing-control directives have no effect.
2134
2135 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2136 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2137
2138 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2139 because it
2140 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2141 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2142 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2143 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2144 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2145
2146 @node alternate
2147 @section @option{--alternate}
2148
2149 @kindex --alternate
2150 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2151
2152 @node D
2153 @section @option{-D}
2154
2155 @kindex -D
2156 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2157 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2158 @command{@value{AS}}.
2159
2160 @node f
2161 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2162
2163 @kindex -f
2164 @cindex trusted compiler
2165 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2166 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2167 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2168 and comment preprocessing on
2169 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2170 ,Preprocessing}.
2171
2172 @quotation
2173 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2174 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2175 not work correctly.
2176 @end quotation
2177
2178 @node I
2179 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2180
2181 @kindex -I @var{path}
2182 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2183 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2184 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2185 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2186 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2187 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2188 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2189 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2190 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2191 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2192
2193 @node K
2194 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2195
2196 @kindex -K
2197 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2198 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2199 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2200 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2201 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2202 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2203 alteration on other platforms.
2204 @end ifclear
2205
2206 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2207 @cindex difference tables, warning
2208 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2209 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2210 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2211 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2212 is done.
2213 @end ifset
2214
2215 @node L
2216 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2217
2218 @kindex -L
2219 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2220 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2221 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2222 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2223 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2224 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2225 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2226 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2227
2228 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2229 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2230 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2231
2232 @node listing
2233 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2234
2235 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2236 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2237 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2238 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2239 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2240 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2241 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2242 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2243
2244 @table @gcctabopt
2245 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2246 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2247 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2248 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2249 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2250
2251 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2252 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2253 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2254 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2255 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2256 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2257 switch is used the default is to one.
2258
2259 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2260 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2261 @cindex Width of source line output
2262 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2263 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2264 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2265
2266 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2267 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2268 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2269 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2270 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2271 @end table
2272
2273 @node M
2274 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2275
2276 @kindex -M
2277 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2278 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2279 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2280 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2281 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2282 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2283 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2284 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2285 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2286
2287 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2288 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2289 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2290 individually. These are:
2291
2292 @itemize @bullet
2293 @item global symbols in common section
2294
2295 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2296 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2297 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2298 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2299 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2300
2301 @item complex relocations
2302
2303 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2304 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2305 are not support by other object file formats.
2306
2307 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2308
2309 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2310 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2311 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2312 script.
2313
2314 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2315
2316 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2317 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2318
2319 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2320
2321 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2322 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2323 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2324 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2325 assigned within a linker script.
2326 @end itemize
2327
2328 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2329 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2330 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2331
2332 @itemize @bullet
2333
2334 @item EBCDIC strings
2335
2336 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2337
2338 @item packed binary coded decimal
2339
2340 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2341 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2342
2343 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2344
2345 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2346
2347 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2348
2349 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2350
2351 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2352
2353 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2354 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2355 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2356 these options serve no purpose.
2357
2358 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2359
2360 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2361 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2362 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2363
2364 @item other @code{OPT} options
2365
2366 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2367 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2368
2369 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2370
2371 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2372 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2373
2374 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2375
2376 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2377
2378 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2379
2380 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2381
2382 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2383
2384 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2385
2386 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2387
2388 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2389
2390 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2391
2392 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2393
2394 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2395
2396 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2397
2398 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2399
2400 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2401
2402 @end itemize
2403
2404 @node MD
2405 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2406
2407 @kindex --MD
2408 @cindex dependency tracking
2409 @cindex make rules
2410
2411 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2412 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2413 dependencies of the main source file.
2414
2415 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2416
2417 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2418
2419 @node o
2420 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2421
2422 @kindex -o
2423 @cindex naming object file
2424 @cindex object file name
2425 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2426 default it has the name
2427 @ifset GENERIC
2428 @ifset I960
2429 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2430 @end ifset
2431 @ifclear I960
2432 @file{a.out}.
2433 @end ifclear
2434 @end ifset
2435 @ifclear GENERIC
2436 @ifset I960
2437 @file{b.out}.
2438 @end ifset
2439 @ifclear I960
2440 @file{a.out}.
2441 @end ifclear
2442 @end ifclear
2443 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2444 object file a different name.
2445
2446 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2447 existing file of the same name.
2448
2449 @node R
2450 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2451
2452 @kindex -R
2453 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2454 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2455 @cindex joining text and data sections
2456 @cindex merging text and data sections
2457 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2458 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2459 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2460 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2461 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2462 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2463
2464 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2465 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2466 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2467 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2468
2469 @ifset COFF-ELF
2470 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2471 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2472 @samp{.data}.
2473 @end ifset
2474
2475 @ifset HPPA
2476 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2477 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2478 @end ifset
2479
2480 @node statistics
2481 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2482
2483 @kindex --statistics
2484 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2485 @cindex time, total for assembly
2486 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2487 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2488 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2489 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2490 seconds).
2491
2492 @node traditional-format
2493 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2494
2495 @kindex --traditional-format
2496 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2497 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2498 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2499
2500 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2501 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2502
2503 @node v
2504 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2505
2506 @kindex -v
2507 @kindex -version
2508 @cindex assembler version
2509 @cindex version of assembler
2510 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2511 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2512 command line.
2513
2514 @node W
2515 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2516
2517 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2518 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2519 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2520 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2521
2522 @kindex -W
2523 @kindex --no-warn
2524 @cindex suppressing warnings
2525 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2526 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2527 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2528 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2529 are still reported.
2530
2531 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2532 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2533 @cindex warnings, causing error
2534 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2535 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2536
2537 @kindex --warn
2538 @cindex warnings, switching on
2539 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2540 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2541
2542 @node Z
2543 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2544 @cindex object file, after errors
2545 @cindex errors, continuing after
2546 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2547 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2548 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2549 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2550 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2551 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2552
2553 @node Syntax
2554 @chapter Syntax
2555
2556 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2557 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2558 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2559 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2560 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2561 @ifclear VAX
2562 assembler.
2563 @end ifclear
2564 @ifset VAX
2565 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2566 @end ifset
2567
2568 @menu
2569 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2570 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2571 * Comments:: Comments
2572 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2573 * Statements:: Statements
2574 * Constants:: Constants
2575 @end menu
2576
2577 @node Preprocessing
2578 @section Preprocessing
2579
2580 @cindex preprocessing
2581 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2582 @itemize @bullet
2583 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2584 @item
2585 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2586 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2587 a single space.
2588
2589 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2590 @item
2591 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2592 appropriate number of newlines.
2593
2594 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2595 @item
2596 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2597 @end itemize
2598
2599 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2600 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2601 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2602 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2603 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2604 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2605 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2606
2607 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2608 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2609 preprocessed.
2610
2611 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2612 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2613 @kindex #NO_APP
2614 @kindex #APP
2615 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2616 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2617 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2618 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2619 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2620 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2621 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2622 and whitespace.
2623
2624 @node Whitespace
2625 @section Whitespace
2626
2627 @cindex whitespace
2628 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2629 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2630 people to read. Unless within character constants
2631 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2632 as exactly one space.
2633
2634 @node Comments
2635 @section Comments
2636
2637 @cindex comments
2638 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2639 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2640
2641 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2642 This means you may not nest these comments.
2643
2644 @smallexample
2645 /*
2646 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2647 is to use this sort of comment.
2648 */
2649
2650 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2651 @end smallexample
2652
2653 @cindex line comment character
2654 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2655 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2656 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2657 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2658 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2659 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2660 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2661 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2662
2663 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2664 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2665 to specify logical line numbers:
2666
2667 @kindex #
2668 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2669 @cindex logical line numbers
2670 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2671 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2672 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2673 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2674 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2675
2676 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2677 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2678
2679 @smallexample
2680 # This is an ordinary comment.
2681 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2682 # This is logical line # 36.
2683 @end smallexample
2684 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2685 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2686
2687 @node Symbol Intro
2688 @section Symbols
2689
2690 @cindex characters used in symbols
2691 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2692 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2693 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2694 @samp{_.$}.
2695 @end ifclear
2696 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2697 @ifclear GENERIC
2698 @ifset H8
2699 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2700 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2701 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2702 symbol names.)
2703 @end ifset
2704 @end ifclear
2705 @end ifset
2706 @ifset GENERIC
2707 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2708 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2709 @end ifset
2710 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2711 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2712 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2713 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2714 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2715 @cindex length of symbols
2716
2717 @node Statements
2718 @section Statements
2719
2720 @cindex statements, structure of
2721 @cindex line separator character
2722 @cindex statement separator character
2723
2724 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2725 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2726 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2727 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2728 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2729 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2730 exception: they do not end statements.
2731
2732 @cindex newline, required at file end
2733 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2734 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2735 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2736
2737 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2738
2739 @cindex instructions and directives
2740 @cindex directives and instructions
2741 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2742 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2743 @c 13feb91.
2744 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2745 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2746 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2747 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2748 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2749 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2750 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2751 @ifset GENERIC
2752 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2753 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2754 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2755 language.@refill
2756 @end ifset
2757
2758 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2759 @cindex label (@code{:})
2760 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2761 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2762 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2763
2764 @ifset HPPA
2765 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2766 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2767 only one label may be defined on each line.
2768 @end ifset
2769
2770 @smallexample
2771 label: .directive followed by something
2772 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2773 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2774 @end smallexample
2775
2776 @node Constants
2777 @section Constants
2778
2779 @cindex constants
2780 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2781 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2782 @smallexample
2783 @group
2784 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2785 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2786 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2787 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2788 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2789 @end group
2790 @end smallexample
2791
2792 @menu
2793 * Characters:: Character Constants
2794 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2795 @end menu
2796
2797 @node Characters
2798 @subsection Character Constants
2799
2800 @cindex character constants
2801 @cindex constants, character
2802 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2803 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2804 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2805 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2806 used in arithmetic expressions.
2807
2808 @menu
2809 * Strings:: Strings
2810 * Chars:: Characters
2811 @end menu
2812
2813 @node Strings
2814 @subsubsection Strings
2815
2816 @cindex string constants
2817 @cindex constants, string
2818 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2819 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2820 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2821 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2822 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2823 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2824 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2825 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2826
2827 @cindex escape codes, character
2828 @cindex character escape codes
2829 @table @kbd
2830 @c @item \a
2831 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2832 @c
2833 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2834 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2835 @item \b
2836 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2837
2838 @c @item \e
2839 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2840 @c
2841 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2842 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2843 @item \f
2844 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2845
2846 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2847 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2848 @item \n
2849 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2850
2851 @c @item \p
2852 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2853 @c
2854 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2855 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2856 @item \r
2857 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2858
2859 @c @item \s
2860 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2861 @c other assemblers.
2862 @c
2863 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2864 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2865 @item \t
2866 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2867
2868 @c @item \v
2869 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2870 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2871 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2872 @c
2873 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2874 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2875 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2876 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2877 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2878 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2879
2880 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2881 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2882 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2883 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2884 lower case @code{x} works.
2885
2886 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2887 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2888 @item \\
2889 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2890
2891 @c @item \'
2892 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2893 @c This is needed in single character literals
2894 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2895 @c a @samp{'}.
2896 @c
2897 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2898 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2899 @item \"
2900 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2901 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2902
2903 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2904 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2905 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2906 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2907 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2908 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2909 code and warns you of the fact.
2910 @end table
2911
2912 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2913 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2914 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2915 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2916 sequence.
2917
2918 @node Chars
2919 @subsubsection Characters
2920
2921 @cindex single character constant
2922 @cindex character, single
2923 @cindex constant, single character
2924 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2925 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2926 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2927 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2928 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2929 grave accent. A newline
2930 @ifclear GENERIC
2931 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2932 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2933 @end ifclear
2934 @ifset abnormal-separator
2935 @ifset H8
2936 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2937 Renesas SH)
2938 @end ifset
2939 @end ifset
2940 @end ifclear
2941 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2942 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2943 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2944 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2945 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2946
2947 @node Numbers
2948 @subsection Number Constants
2949
2950 @cindex constants, number
2951 @cindex number constants
2952 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2953 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2954 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2955 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2956 are floating point numbers, described below.
2957
2958 @menu
2959 * Integers:: Integers
2960 * Bignums:: Bignums
2961 * Flonums:: Flonums
2962 @ifclear GENERIC
2963 @ifset I960
2964 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2965 @end ifset
2966 @end ifclear
2967 @end menu
2968
2969 @node Integers
2970 @subsubsection Integers
2971 @cindex integers
2972 @cindex constants, integer
2973
2974 @cindex binary integers
2975 @cindex integers, binary
2976 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2977 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2978
2979 @cindex octal integers
2980 @cindex integers, octal
2981 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2982 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2983
2984 @cindex decimal integers
2985 @cindex integers, decimal
2986 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2987 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2988
2989 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2990 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2991 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2992 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2993
2994 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2995 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2996 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2997
2998 @node Bignums
2999 @subsubsection Bignums
3000
3001 @cindex bignums
3002 @cindex constants, bignum
3003 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3004 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3005 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3006 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3007
3008 @node Flonums
3009 @subsubsection Flonums
3010 @cindex flonums
3011 @cindex floating point numbers
3012 @cindex constants, floating point
3013
3014 @cindex precision, floating point
3015 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3016 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3017 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3018 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3019 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3020 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3021
3022 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3023 @itemize @bullet
3024 @item
3025 The digit @samp{0}.
3026 @ifset HPPA
3027 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3028 @end ifset
3029
3030 @item
3031 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3032 @ifset GENERIC
3033 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3034 @ignore
3035 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3036 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3037 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3038 @end ignore
3039
3040 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3041 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3042 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3043
3044 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3045 (in upper or lower case).
3046
3047 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3048 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3049
3050 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3051 @end ifset
3052 @ifclear GENERIC
3053 @ifset ARC
3054 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3055 @end ifset
3056 @ifset H8
3057 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3058 @end ifset
3059 @ifset HPPA
3060 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3061 @end ifset
3062 @ifset I960
3063 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3064 @end ifset
3065 @end ifclear
3066
3067 @item
3068 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3069
3070 @item
3071 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3072
3073 @item
3074 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3075 or more decimal digits.
3076
3077 @item
3078 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3079
3080 @itemize @bullet
3081 @item
3082 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3083 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3084 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3085 @item
3086 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3087 @item
3088 One or more decimal digits.
3089 @end itemize
3090
3091 @end itemize
3092
3093 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3094 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3095
3096 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3097 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3098 @command{@value{AS}}.
3099
3100 @ifclear GENERIC
3101 @ifset I960
3102 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3103 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3104 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3105 @node Bit Fields
3106 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3107
3108 @cindex bit fields
3109 @cindex constants, bit field
3110 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3111 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3112 @example
3113 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3114 @end example
3115 @noindent
3116 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3117 @var{value}.
3118
3119 The resulting number is then packed
3120 @ifset GENERIC
3121 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3122 (in host-dependent byte order)
3123 @end ifset
3124 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3125 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3126 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3127 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3128 least significant digits.@refill
3129
3130 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3131 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3132 @end ifset
3133 @end ifclear
3134
3135 @node Sections
3136 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3137 @cindex sections
3138 @cindex relocation
3139
3140 @menu
3141 * Secs Background:: Background
3142 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3143 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3144 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3145 * bss:: bss Section
3146 @end menu
3147
3148 @node Secs Background
3149 @section Background
3150
3151 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3152 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3153 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3154
3155 @cindex linker, and assembler
3156 @cindex assembler, and linker
3157 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3158 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3159 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3160 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3161 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3162 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3163 sections.
3164
3165 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3166 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3167 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3168 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3169 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3170 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3171 the proper run-time addresses.
3172 @ifset H8
3173 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3174 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3175 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3176 @end ifset
3177
3178 @cindex standard assembler sections
3179 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3180 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3181 @dfn{bss} sections.
3182
3183 @ifset COFF-ELF
3184 @ifset GENERIC
3185 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3186 @end ifset
3187 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3188 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3189 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3190 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3191 @end ifset
3192
3193 @ifset HPPA
3194 @ifset GENERIC
3195 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3196 @end ifset
3197 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3198 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3199 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3200 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3201 assembler directives.
3202
3203 @ifset SOM
3204 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3205 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3206 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3207 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3208 @end ifset
3209 @end ifset
3210
3211 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3212 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3213
3214 @ifset HPPA
3215 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3216 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3217 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3218 @end ifset
3219
3220 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3221 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3222 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3223 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3224 file is mentioned:
3225 @itemize @bullet
3226 @item
3227 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3228 an address?
3229 @item
3230 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3231 @item
3232 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3233 @display
3234 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3235 @end display
3236 @item
3237 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3238 @end itemize
3239
3240 @cindex addresses, format of
3241 @cindex section-relative addressing
3242 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3243 @display
3244 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3245 @end display
3246 @noindent
3247 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3248 nature.
3249 @ifset SOM
3250 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3251 symbol-relative instead.)
3252 @end ifset
3253
3254 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3255 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3256
3257 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3258 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3259 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3260 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3261 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3262 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3263 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3264 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3265 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3266
3267 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3268 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3269 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3270 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3271 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3272 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3273 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3274
3275 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3276 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3277 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3278 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3279 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3280 data and bss sections.
3281
3282 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3283 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3284
3285 @node Ld Sections
3286 @section Linker Sections
3287 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3288
3289 @table @strong
3290
3291 @ifset COFF-ELF
3292 @cindex named sections
3293 @cindex sections, named
3294 @item named sections
3295 @end ifset
3296 @ifset aout-bout
3297 @cindex text section
3298 @cindex data section
3299 @itemx text section
3300 @itemx data section
3301 @end ifset
3302 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3303 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3304 true of another.
3305 @c @ifset aout-bout
3306 When the program is running, however, it is
3307 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3308 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3309 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3310 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3311 in the data section.
3312 @c @end ifset
3313
3314 @cindex bss section
3315 @item bss section
3316 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3317 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3318 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3319 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3320 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3321 those explicit zeros from object files.
3322
3323 @cindex absolute section
3324 @item absolute section
3325 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3326 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3327 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3328 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3329
3330 @cindex undefined section
3331 @item undefined section
3332 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3333 the preceding sections.
3334 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3335 @end table
3336
3337 @cindex relocation example
3338 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3339 @ifset COFF-ELF
3340 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3341 @end ifset
3342 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3343
3344 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3345 @ifnottex
3346 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3347 @smallexample
3348 +-----+----+--+
3349 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3350 +-----+----+--+
3351
3352 text data bss
3353 seg. seg. seg.
3354
3355 +---+---+---+
3356 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3357 +---+---+---+
3358
3359 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3360 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3361 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3362
3363 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3364 @end smallexample
3365 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3366 @end ifnottex
3367 @need 5000
3368 @tex
3369 \bigskip
3370 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3371 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3372 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3373
3374 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3375 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3376 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3377
3378 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3379 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3380 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3381 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3382 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3383
3384 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3385 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3386
3387 @end tex
3388 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3389
3390 @node As Sections
3391 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3392
3393 @cindex internal assembler sections
3394 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3395 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3396 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3397 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3398 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3399 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3400 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3401 section-relative address.
3402
3403 @table @b
3404 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3405 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3406 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3407 bug in the assembler.
3408
3409 @cindex expr (internal section)
3410 @item expr section
3411 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3412 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3413 it in the expr section.
3414 @c FIXME item debug
3415 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3416 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3417 @c FIXME item register
3418 @end table
3419
3420 @node Sub-Sections
3421 @section Sub-Sections
3422
3423 @cindex numbered subsections
3424 @cindex grouping data
3425 @ifset aout-bout
3426 Assembled bytes
3427 @ifset COFF-ELF
3428 conventionally
3429 @end ifset
3430 fall into two sections: text and data.
3431 @end ifset
3432 You may have separate groups of
3433 @ifset GENERIC
3434 data in named sections
3435 @end ifset
3436 @ifclear GENERIC
3437 @ifclear aout-bout
3438 data in named sections
3439 @end ifclear
3440 @ifset aout-bout
3441 text or data
3442 @end ifset
3443 @end ifclear
3444 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3445 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3446 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3447 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3448 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3449 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3450 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3451 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3452 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3453 constants being output.
3454
3455 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3456 goes in subsection number zero.
3457
3458 @ifset GENERIC
3459 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3460 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3461 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3462 @end ifset
3463 @ifclear GENERIC
3464 @ifset H8
3465 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3466 boundary (two bytes).
3467 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3468 @end ifset
3469 @ifset I960
3470 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3471 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3472 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3473 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3474 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3475 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3476 @end ifset
3477 @end ifclear
3478
3479 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3480 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3481 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3482 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3483 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3484 data subsections as a data section.
3485
3486 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3487 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3488 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3489 @ifset COFF
3490 @ifset GENERIC
3491 When generating COFF output, you
3492 @end ifset
3493 @ifclear GENERIC
3494 You
3495 @end ifclear
3496 can also use an extra subsection
3497 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3498 @var{expression}}.
3499 @end ifset
3500 @ifset ELF
3501 @ifset GENERIC
3502 When generating ELF output, you
3503 @end ifset
3504 @ifclear GENERIC
3505 You
3506 @end ifclear
3507 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3508 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3509 @end ifset
3510 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3511 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3512 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3513 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3514 @smallexample
3515 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3516 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3517 .text 1
3518 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3519 .data 0
3520 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3521 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3522 .text 0
3523 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3524 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3525 @end smallexample
3526
3527 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3528 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3529 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3530 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3531 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3532 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3533 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3534
3535 @node bss
3536 @section bss Section
3537
3538 @cindex bss section
3539 @cindex common variable storage
3540 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3541 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3542 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3543 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3544 section are zeroed bytes.
3545
3546 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3547 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3548
3549 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3550 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3551
3552 @ifset GENERIC
3553 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3554 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3555 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3556 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3557 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3558 @end ifset
3559
3560 @node Symbols
3561 @chapter Symbols
3562
3563 @cindex symbols
3564 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3565 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3566 to debug.
3567
3568 @quotation
3569 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3570 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3571 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3572 @end quotation
3573
3574 @menu
3575 * Labels:: Labels
3576 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3577 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3578 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3579 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3580 @end menu
3581
3582 @node Labels
3583 @section Labels
3584
3585 @cindex labels
3586 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3587 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3588 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3589 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3590 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3591 definitions.
3592
3593 @ifset HPPA
3594 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3595 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3596 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3597 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3598 @end ifset
3599
3600 @node Setting Symbols
3601 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3602
3603 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3604 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3605 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3606 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3607 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3608 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3609 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3610 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3611
3612 @ifset Blackfin
3613 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3614 @end ifset
3615
3616 @node Symbol Names
3617 @section Symbol Names
3618
3619 @cindex symbol names
3620 @cindex names, symbol
3621 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3622 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3623 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3624 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3625 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3626 particular target machine), and underscores.
3627 @end ifclear
3628 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3629 @ifset H8
3630 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3631 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3632 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3633 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3634 @end ifset
3635 @end ifset
3636
3637 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3638 than @code{Foo}.
3639
3640 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3641 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3642 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3643 currently supported.
3644
3645 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3646 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3647 in a program.
3648
3649 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3650
3651 @cindex local symbol names
3652 @cindex symbol names, local
3653 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3654 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3655 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3656 set of local label prefixes.
3657 @ifset HPPA
3658 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3659 @end ifset
3660
3661 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3662 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3663 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3664 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3665
3666 @subheading Local Labels
3667
3668 @cindex local labels
3669 @cindex temporary symbol names
3670 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3671 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3672 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3673 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3674 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3675 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3676 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3677 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3678 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3679 for ``forwards''.
3680
3681 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3682 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3683 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3684 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3685 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3686 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3687 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3688
3689 Here is an example:
3690
3691 @smallexample
3692 1: branch 1f
3693 2: branch 1b
3694 1: branch 2f
3695 2: branch 1b
3696 @end smallexample
3697
3698 Which is the equivalent of:
3699
3700 @smallexample
3701 label_1: branch label_3
3702 label_2: branch label_1
3703 label_3: branch label_4
3704 label_4: branch label_3
3705 @end smallexample
3706
3707 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3708 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3709 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3710 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3711 these parts:
3712
3713 @table @code
3714 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3715 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3716 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3717 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3718 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3719 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3720 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3721 you may use them in debugging.
3722
3723 @item @var{number}
3724 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3725 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3726
3727 @item @kbd{C-B}
3728 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3729 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3730
3731 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3732 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3733 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3734 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3735 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3736 @end table
3737
3738 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3739 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3740
3741 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3742 @cindex dollar local symbols
3743
3744 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3745 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3746 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3747 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3748 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3749 the same local label.
3750
3751 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3752 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3753 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3754
3755 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3756 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3757 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3758 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3759
3760 @node Dot
3761 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3762
3763 @cindex dot (symbol)
3764 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3765 @cindex current address
3766 @cindex location counter
3767 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3768 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3769 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3770 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3771 directive.
3772 @ifclear no-space-dir
3773 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3774 @samp{.space 4}.
3775 @end ifclear
3776
3777 @node Symbol Attributes
3778 @section Symbol Attributes
3779
3780 @cindex symbol attributes
3781 @cindex attributes, symbol
3782 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3783 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3784 attributes.
3785 @ifset INTERNALS
3786 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3787 @end ifset
3788
3789 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3790 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3791 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3792 would want.
3793
3794 @menu
3795 * Symbol Value:: Value
3796 * Symbol Type:: Type
3797 @ifset aout-bout
3798 @ifset GENERIC
3799 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3800 @end ifset
3801 @ifclear GENERIC
3802 @ifclear BOUT
3803 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3804 @end ifclear
3805 @ifset BOUT
3806 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3807 @end ifset
3808 @end ifclear
3809 @end ifset
3810 @ifset COFF
3811 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3812 @end ifset
3813 @ifset SOM
3814 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3815 @end ifset
3816 @end menu
3817
3818 @node Symbol Value
3819 @subsection Value
3820
3821 @cindex value of a symbol
3822 @cindex symbol value
3823 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3824 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3825 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3826 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3827 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3828 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3829 called absolute.
3830
3831 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3832 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3833 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3834 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3835 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3836 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3837 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3838 allocated storage.
3839
3840 @node Symbol Type
3841 @subsection Type
3842
3843 @cindex type of a symbol
3844 @cindex symbol type
3845 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3846 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3847 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3848 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3849
3850 @ifset aout-bout
3851 @ifclear GENERIC
3852 @ifset BOUT
3853 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3854 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3855 @need 1000
3856 @node a.out Symbols
3857 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3858
3859 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3860 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3861 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3862 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3863 @code{b.out}.
3864
3865 @end ifset
3866 @ifclear BOUT
3867 @node a.out Symbols
3868 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3869
3870 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3871 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3872
3873 @end ifclear
3874 @end ifclear
3875 @ifset GENERIC
3876 @node a.out Symbols
3877 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3878
3879 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3880 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3881
3882 @end ifset
3883 @menu
3884 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3885 * Symbol Other:: Other
3886 @end menu
3887
3888 @node Symbol Desc
3889 @subsubsection Descriptor
3890
3891 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3892 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3893 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3894 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3895 @command{@value{AS}}.
3896
3897 @node Symbol Other
3898 @subsubsection Other
3899
3900 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3901 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3902 @end ifset
3903
3904 @ifset COFF
3905 @node COFF Symbols
3906 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3907
3908 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3909 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3910
3911 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3912 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3913 @code{.endef} directives.
3914
3915 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3916
3917 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3918 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3919 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3920
3921 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3922
3923 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3924 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3925 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3926 table information for COFF.
3927 @end ifset
3928
3929 @ifset SOM
3930 @node SOM Symbols
3931 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3932
3933 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3934 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3935
3936 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3937 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3938
3939 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3940 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3941 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3942 @end ifset
3943
3944 @node Expressions
3945 @chapter Expressions
3946
3947 @cindex expressions
3948 @cindex addresses
3949 @cindex numeric values
3950 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3951 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3952
3953 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3954 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3955 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3956 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3957 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3958 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3959
3960 @menu
3961 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3962 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3963 @end menu
3964
3965 @node Empty Exprs
3966 @section Empty Expressions
3967
3968 @cindex empty expressions
3969 @cindex expressions, empty
3970 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3971 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3972 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3973 is compatible with other assemblers.
3974
3975 @node Integer Exprs
3976 @section Integer Expressions
3977
3978 @cindex integer expressions
3979 @cindex expressions, integer
3980 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3981 by @emph{operators}.
3982
3983 @menu
3984 * Arguments:: Arguments
3985 * Operators:: Operators
3986 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3987 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3988 @end menu
3989
3990 @node Arguments
3991 @subsection Arguments
3992
3993 @cindex expression arguments
3994 @cindex arguments in expressions
3995 @cindex operands in expressions
3996 @cindex arithmetic operands
3997 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3998 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3999 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4000 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4001 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4002 instruction operands.
4003
4004 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4005 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4006 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4007 integer.
4008
4009 Numbers are usually integers.
4010
4011 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4012 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4013 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4014 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4015 assemblers.
4016
4017 @cindex subexpressions
4018 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4019 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4020 operator followed by an argument.
4021
4022 @node Operators
4023 @subsection Operators
4024
4025 @cindex operators, in expressions
4026 @cindex arithmetic functions
4027 @cindex functions, in expressions
4028 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4029 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4030 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4031 whitespace.
4032
4033 @node Prefix Ops
4034 @subsection Prefix Operator
4035
4036 @cindex prefix operators
4037 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4038 one argument, which must be absolute.
4039
4040 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4041 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4042 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4043 @tex
4044 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4045 @end tex
4046
4047 @table @code
4048 @item -
4049 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4050 @item ~
4051 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4052 @end table
4053
4054 @tex
4055 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4056 @end tex
4057
4058 @node Infix Ops
4059 @subsection Infix Operators
4060
4061 @cindex infix operators
4062 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4063 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4064 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4065 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4066 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4067
4068 @enumerate
4069 @cindex operator precedence
4070 @cindex precedence of operators
4071
4072 @item
4073 Highest Precedence
4074
4075 @table @code
4076 @item *
4077 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4078
4079 @item /
4080 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4081
4082 @item %
4083 @dfn{Remainder}.
4084
4085 @item <<
4086 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4087
4088 @item >>
4089 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4090 @end table
4091
4092 @item
4093 Intermediate precedence
4094
4095 @table @code
4096 @item |
4097
4098 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4099
4100 @item &
4101 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4102
4103 @item ^
4104 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4105
4106 @item !
4107 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4108 @end table
4109
4110 @item
4111 Low Precedence
4112
4113 @table @code
4114 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4115 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4116 @cindex arguments for addition
4117 @item +
4118 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4119 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4120 sections.
4121
4122 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4123 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4124 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4125 @item -
4126 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4127 result has the section of the left argument.
4128 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4129 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4130 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4131
4132 @cindex comparison expressions
4133 @cindex expressions, comparison
4134 @item ==
4135 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4136 @item <>
4137 @itemx !=
4138 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4139 @item <
4140 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4141 @item >
4142 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4143 @item >=
4144 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4145 @item <=
4146 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4147
4148 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4149 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4150 perform signed comparisons.
4151 @end table
4152
4153 @item Lowest Precedence
4154
4155 @table @code
4156 @item &&
4157 @dfn{Logical And}.
4158
4159 @item ||
4160 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4161
4162 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4163 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4164 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4165 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4166
4167 @end table
4168 @end enumerate
4169
4170 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4171 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4172
4173 @node Pseudo Ops
4174 @chapter Assembler Directives
4175
4176 @cindex directives, machine independent
4177 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4178 @cindex machine independent directives
4179 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4180 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4181
4182 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4183 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4184 @ifset GENERIC
4185 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4186 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4187 @end ifset
4188 @ifclear GENERIC
4189 @ifset machine-directives
4190 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4191 @end ifset
4192 @end ifclear
4193
4194 @menu
4195 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4196 @ifset COFF
4197 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4198 @end ifset
4199
4200 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4201 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4202 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4203 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4204 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4205 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4206 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4207 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4208 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4209 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4210 @ifset COFF
4211 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4212 @end ifset
4213 @ifset aout-bout
4214 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4215 @end ifset
4216 @ifset COFF
4217 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4218 @end ifset
4219
4220 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4221 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4222 * Else:: @code{.else}
4223 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4224 * End:: @code{.end}
4225 @ifset COFF
4226 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4227 @end ifset
4228
4229 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4230 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4231 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4232 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4233 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4234 * Err:: @code{.err}
4235 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4236 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4237 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4238 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4239 * File:: @code{.file}
4240 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4241 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4242 * Func:: @code{.func}
4243 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4244 @ifset ELF
4245 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4246 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4247 @end ifset
4248
4249 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4250 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4251 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4252 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4253 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4254 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4255 @ifset ELF
4256 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4257 @end ifset
4258
4259 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4260 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4261 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4262 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4263 @ifclear no-line-dir
4264 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4265 @end ifclear
4266
4267 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4268 * List:: @code{.list}
4269 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4270 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4271 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4272 @ifset ELF
4273 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4274 @end ifset
4275
4276 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4277 @ignore
4278 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4279 @end ignore
4280
4281 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4282 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4283 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4284 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4285 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4286 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4287 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4288 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4289 @ifset ELF
4290 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4291 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4292 @end ifset
4293
4294 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4295 @ifset ELF
4296 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4297 @end ifset
4298
4299 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4300 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4301 @ifset ELF
4302 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4303 @end ifset
4304
4305 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4306 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4307 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4308 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4309 @ifset COFF
4310 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4311 @end ifset
4312 @ifset COFF-ELF
4313 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4314 @end ifset
4315
4316 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4317 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4318 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4319 @ifset COFF-ELF
4320 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4321 @end ifset
4322 @ifclear no-space-dir
4323 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4324 @end ifclear
4325
4326 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4327 @ifclear no-space-dir
4328 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4329 @end ifclear
4330 @ifset have-stabs
4331 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4332 @end ifset
4333
4334 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4335 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4336 @ifset ELF
4337 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4338 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4339 @end ifset
4340
4341 @ifset COFF
4342 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4343 @end ifset
4344
4345 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4346 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4347 @ifset COFF-ELF
4348 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4349 @end ifset
4350
4351 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4352 @ifset COFF
4353 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4354 @end ifset
4355
4356 @ifset ELF
4357 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4358 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4359 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4360 @end ifset
4361
4362 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4363 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4364 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4365 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4366 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4367 @end menu
4368
4369 @node Abort
4370 @section @code{.abort}
4371
4372 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4373 @cindex stopping the assembly
4374 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4375 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4376 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4377 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4378 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4379
4380 @ifset COFF
4381 @node ABORT (COFF)
4382 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4383
4384 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4385 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4386 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4387
4388 @ifset BOUT
4389 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4390 but ignores it.
4391 @end ifset
4392 @end ifset
4393
4394 @node Align
4395 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4396
4397 @cindex padding the location counter
4398 @cindex @code{align} directive
4399 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4400 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4401 required, as described below.
4402
4403 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4404 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4405 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4406 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4407 with no-op instructions.
4408
4409 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4410 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4411 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4412 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4413 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4414 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4415 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4416
4417 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4418 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4419 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4420 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4421 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4422 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4423 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4424
4425 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4426 strongarm, it is the
4427 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4428 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4429 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4430 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4431
4432 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4433 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4434 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4435 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4436 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4437
4438 @node Altmacro
4439 @section @code{.altmacro}
4440 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4441
4442 @ftable @code
4443 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4444 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4445 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4446 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4447 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4448 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4449 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4450
4451 @item String delimiters
4452 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4453 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4454
4455 @table @code
4456 @item '@var{string}'
4457 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4458
4459 @item <@var{string}>
4460 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4461 @end table
4462
4463 @item single-character string escape
4464 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4465 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4466 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4467 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4468
4469 @item Expression results as strings
4470 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4471 and use the result as a string.
4472 @end ftable
4473
4474 @node Ascii
4475 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4476
4477 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4478 @cindex string literals
4479 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4480 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4481 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4482
4483 @node Asciz
4484 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4485
4486 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4487 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4488 @cindex null-terminated strings
4489 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4490 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4491
4492 @node Balign
4493 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4494
4495 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4496 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4497 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4498 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4499 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4500 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4501 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4502
4503 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4504 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4505 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4506 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4507 with no-op instructions.
4508
4509 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4510 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4511 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4512 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4513 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4514 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4515 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4516
4517 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4518 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4519 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4520 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4521 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4522 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4523 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4524 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4525 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4526 undefined.
4527
4528 @node Bundle directives
4529 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4530 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4531 @cindex bundle
4532 @cindex instruction bundle
4533 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4534 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4535 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4536 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4537 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4538 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4539 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4540
4541 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4542 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4543 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4544 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4545 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4546 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4547 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4548 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4549 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4550 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4551 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4552
4553 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4554 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4555 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4556 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4557 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4558 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4559 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4560 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4561 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4562
4563 @cindex bundle-locked
4564 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4565 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4566 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4567 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4568 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4569 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4570 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4571 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4572 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4573 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4574 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4575 bundle size.
4576
4577 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4578 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4579 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4580 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4581 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4582 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4583
4584 @node Byte
4585 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4586
4587 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4588 @cindex integers, one byte
4589 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4590 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4591
4592 @node CFI directives
4593 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4594 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4595 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4596 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4597 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4598 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4599 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4600 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4601
4602 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4603 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4604 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4605 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4606 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4607 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4608
4609 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4610 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4611
4612 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4613 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4614 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4615 unwind entry previously opened by
4616 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4617
4618 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4619 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4620 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4621 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4622 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4623 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4624 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4625 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4626 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4627 no personality routine.
4628
4629 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4630 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4631 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4632 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4633 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4634 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4635 no LSDA.
4636
4637 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4638 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4639 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4640
4641 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4642 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4643 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4644 remains the same.
4645
4646 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4647 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4648 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4649 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4650 CFA address.
4651
4652 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4653 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4654 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4655
4656 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4657 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4658 CFA.
4659
4660 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4661 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4662 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4663 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4664 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4665 code it's annotating.
4666
4667 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4668 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4669
4670 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4671 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4672 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4673 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4674
4675 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4676 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4677
4678 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4679 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4680 i.e. no restoration needed.
4681
4682 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4683 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4684 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4685 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4686 the previous saved state.
4687
4688 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4689 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4690 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4691
4692 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4693 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4694
4695 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4696 SPARC register window has been saved.
4697
4698 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4699 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4700 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4701 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4702
4703 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4704 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4705 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4706 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4707
4708 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4709 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4710 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4711 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4712 or another register.
4713
4714 @node Comm
4715 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4716
4717 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4718 @cindex symbol, common
4719 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4720 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4721 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4722 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4723 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4724 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4725 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4726 using the largest size.
4727
4728 @ifset COFF-ELF
4729 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4730 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4731 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4732 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4733 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4734 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4735 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4736 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4737 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4738 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4739 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4740 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4741 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4742 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4743 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4744 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4745 @end ifset
4746
4747 @ifset HPPA
4748 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4749 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4750 @end ifset
4751
4752 @node Data
4753 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4754
4755 @cindex @code{data} directive
4756 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4757 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4758 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4759 to zero.
4760
4761 @ifset COFF
4762 @node Def
4763 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4764
4765 @cindex @code{def} directive
4766 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4767 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4768 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4769 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4770 @ifset BOUT
4771
4772 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4773 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4774 but ignored.
4775 @end ifset
4776 @end ifset
4777
4778 @ifset aout-bout
4779 @node Desc
4780 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4781
4782 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4783 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4784 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4785 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4786 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4787
4788 @ifset COFF
4789 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4790 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4791 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4792 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4793 @end ifset
4794 @end ifset
4795
4796 @ifset COFF
4797 @node Dim
4798 @section @code{.dim}
4799
4800 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4801 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4802 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4803 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4804 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4805 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4806 @ifset BOUT
4807
4808 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4809 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4810 ignores it.
4811 @end ifset
4812 @end ifset
4813
4814 @node Double
4815 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4816
4817 @cindex @code{double} directive
4818 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4819 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4820 assembles floating point numbers.
4821 @ifset GENERIC
4822 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4823 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4824 @end ifset
4825 @ifclear GENERIC
4826 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4827 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4828 in @sc{ieee} format.
4829 @end ifset
4830 @end ifclear
4831
4832 @node Eject
4833 @section @code{.eject}
4834
4835 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4836 @cindex new page, in listings
4837 @cindex page, in listings
4838 @cindex listing control: new page
4839 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4840
4841 @node Else
4842 @section @code{.else}
4843
4844 @cindex @code{else} directive
4845 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4846 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4847 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4848 was false.
4849
4850 @node Elseif
4851 @section @code{.elseif}
4852
4853 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4854 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4855 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4856 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4857
4858 @node End
4859 @section @code{.end}
4860
4861 @cindex @code{end} directive
4862 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4863 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4864
4865 @ifset COFF
4866 @node Endef
4867 @section @code{.endef}
4868
4869 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4870 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4871 @code{.def}.
4872 @ifset BOUT
4873
4874 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4875 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4876 directive but ignores it.
4877 @end ifset
4878 @end ifset
4879
4880 @node Endfunc
4881 @section @code{.endfunc}
4882 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4883 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4884
4885 @node Endif
4886 @section @code{.endif}
4887
4888 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4889 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4890 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4891 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4892
4893 @node Equ
4894 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4895
4896 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4897 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4898 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4899 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4900 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4901
4902 @ifset HPPA
4903 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4904 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4905 @end ifset
4906
4907 @ifset Z80
4908 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4909 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4910 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4911 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4912 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4913 @end ifset
4914
4915 @node Equiv
4916 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4917 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4918 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4919 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4920 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4921 undefined.
4922
4923 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4924 @smallexample
4925 .ifdef SYM
4926 .err
4927 .endif
4928 .equ SYM,VAL
4929 @end smallexample
4930 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4931
4932 @node Eqv
4933 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4934 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4935 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4936 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4937 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4938 value is taken.
4939
4940 @node Err
4941 @section @code{.err}
4942 @cindex @code{err} directive
4943 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4944 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4945 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4946
4947 @node Error
4948 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4949 @cindex error directive
4950
4951 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4952 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4953 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4954 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4955
4956 @smallexample
4957 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4958 @end smallexample
4959
4960 @node Exitm
4961 @section @code{.exitm}
4962 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4963
4964 @node Extern
4965 @section @code{.extern}
4966
4967 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4968 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4969 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4970 all undefined symbols as external.
4971
4972 @node Fail
4973 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4974
4975 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4976 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4977 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4978 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4979 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4980 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4981
4982 @node File
4983 @section @code{.file}
4984 @cindex @code{file} directive
4985
4986 @ifclear no-file-dir
4987 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4988 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4989 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4990
4991 @subheading Default Version
4992
4993 @cindex logical file name
4994 @cindex file name, logical
4995 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4996 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4997
4998 @smallexample
4999 .file @var{string}
5000 @end smallexample
5001
5002 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5003 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5004 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5005 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5006 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5007
5008 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5009 @end ifclear
5010
5011 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5012 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5013
5014 @smallexample
5015 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5016 @end smallexample
5017
5018 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5019 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5020 literal.
5021
5022 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5023 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5024 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5025 entries will have.
5026
5027 @node Fill
5028 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5029
5030 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5031 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5032 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5033 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5034 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5035 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5036 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5037 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5038 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5039 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5040 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5041 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5042 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5043 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5044
5045 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5046 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5047 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5048 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5049
5050 @node Float
5051 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5052
5053 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5054 @cindex @code{float} directive
5055 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5056 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5057 @ifset GENERIC
5058 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5059 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5060 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5061 @end ifset
5062 @ifclear GENERIC
5063 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5064 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5065 in @sc{ieee} format.
5066 @end ifset
5067 @end ifclear
5068
5069 @node Func
5070 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5071 @cindex @code{func} directive
5072 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5073 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5074 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5075 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5076 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5077 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5078 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5079 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5080
5081 @node Global
5082 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5083
5084 @cindex @code{global} directive
5085 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5086 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5087 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5088 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5089 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5090 from another file linked into the same program.
5091
5092 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5093 compatibility with other assemblers.
5094
5095 @ifset HPPA
5096 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5097 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5098 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5099 @end ifset
5100
5101 @ifset ELF
5102 @node Gnu_attribute
5103 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5104 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5105
5106 @node Hidden
5107 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5108
5109 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5110 @cindex visibility
5111 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5112 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5113 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5114
5115 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5116 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5117 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5118 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5119 @end ifset
5120
5121 @node hword
5122 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5123
5124 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5125 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5126 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5127 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5128 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5129 a 16 bit number for each.
5130
5131 @ifset GENERIC
5132 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5133 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5134 @end ifset
5135 @ifclear GENERIC
5136 @ifset W32
5137 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5138 @end ifset
5139 @ifset W16
5140 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5141 @end ifset
5142 @end ifclear
5143
5144 @node Ident
5145 @section @code{.ident}
5146
5147 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5148
5149 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5150 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5151 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5152 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5153 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5154 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5155 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5156
5157 @node If
5158 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5159
5160 @cindex conditional assembly
5161 @cindex @code{if} directive
5162 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5163 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5164 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5165 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5166 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5167 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5168 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5169 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5170
5171 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5172 @table @code
5173 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5174 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5175 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5176 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5177 is considered to be undefined.
5178
5179 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5180 @item .ifb @var{text}
5181 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5182
5183 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5184 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5185 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5186 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5187 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5188 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5189 string comparison is case sensitive.
5190
5191 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5192 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5193 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5194
5195 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5196 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5197 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5198
5199 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5200 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5201 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5202 equal to zero.
5203
5204 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5205 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5206 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5207
5208 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5209 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5210 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5211 to zero.
5212
5213 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5214 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5215 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5216
5217 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5218 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5219 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5220 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5221
5222 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5223 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5224 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5225 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5226
5227 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5228 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5229 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5230 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5231 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5232 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5233 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5234
5235 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5236 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5237 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5238 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5239
5240 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5241 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5242 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5243 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5244 @end table
5245
5246 @node Incbin
5247 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5248
5249 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5250 @cindex binary files, including
5251 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5252 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5253 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5254 around @var{file}.
5255
5256 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5257 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5258 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5259 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5260 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5261
5262 @node Include
5263 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5264
5265 @cindex @code{include} directive
5266 @cindex supporting files, including
5267 @cindex files, including
5268 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5269 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5270 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5271 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5272 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5273 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5274 around @var{file}.
5275
5276 @node Int
5277 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5278
5279 @cindex @code{int} directive
5280 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5281 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5282 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5283 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5284 of target the assembly is for.
5285
5286 @ifclear GENERIC
5287 @ifset H8
5288 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5289 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5290 32-bit integers.
5291 @end ifset
5292 @end ifclear
5293
5294 @ifset ELF
5295 @node Internal
5296 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5297
5298 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5299 @cindex visibility
5300 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5301 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5302 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5303
5304 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5305 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5306 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5307 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5308 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5309 @end ifset
5310
5311 @node Irp
5312 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5313
5314 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5315 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5316 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5317 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5318 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5319 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5320 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5321 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5322
5323 For example, assembling
5324
5325 @example
5326 .irp param,1,2,3
5327 move d\param,sp@@-
5328 .endr
5329 @end example
5330
5331 is equivalent to assembling
5332
5333 @example
5334 move d1,sp@@-
5335 move d2,sp@@-
5336 move d3,sp@@-
5337 @end example
5338
5339 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5340
5341 @node Irpc
5342 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5343
5344 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5345 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5346 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5347 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5348 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5349 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5350 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5351 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5352
5353 For example, assembling
5354
5355 @example
5356 .irpc param,123
5357 move d\param,sp@@-
5358 .endr
5359 @end example
5360
5361 is equivalent to assembling
5362
5363 @example
5364 move d1,sp@@-
5365 move d2,sp@@-
5366 move d3,sp@@-
5367 @end example
5368
5369 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5370 at @xref{Macro}.
5371
5372 @node Lcomm
5373 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5374
5375 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5376 @cindex local common symbols
5377 @cindex symbols, local common
5378 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5379 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5380 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5381 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5382 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5383 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5384
5385 @ifset GENERIC
5386 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5387 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5388 @end ifset
5389
5390 @ifset HPPA
5391 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5392 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5393 @end ifset
5394
5395 @node Lflags
5396 @section @code{.lflags}
5397
5398 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5399 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5400 assemblers, but ignores it.
5401
5402 @ifclear no-line-dir
5403 @node Line
5404 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5405
5406 @cindex @code{line} directive
5407 @cindex logical line number
5408 @ifset aout-bout
5409 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5410 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5411 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5412 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5413 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5414 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5415 @end ifset
5416
5417 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5418 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5419 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5420 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5421 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5422
5423 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5424 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5425 debugging.
5426 @end ifclear
5427
5428 @node Linkonce
5429 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5430 @cindex COMDAT
5431 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5432 @cindex common sections
5433 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5434 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5435 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5436 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5437 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5438 unique.
5439
5440 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5441 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5442 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5443
5444 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5445 following strings. For example:
5446 @smallexample
5447 .linkonce same_size
5448 @end smallexample
5449 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5450
5451 @table @code
5452 @item discard
5453 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5454
5455 @item one_only
5456 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5457
5458 @item same_size
5459 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5460
5461 @item same_contents
5462 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5463 @end table
5464
5465 @node List
5466 @section @code{.list}
5467
5468 @cindex @code{list} directive
5469 @cindex listing control, turning on
5470 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5471 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5472 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5473 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5474 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5475
5476 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5477 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5478 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5479
5480 @node Ln
5481 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5482
5483 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5484 @ifclear no-line-dir
5485 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5486 @end ifclear
5487 @ifset no-line-dir
5488 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5489 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5490 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5491 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5492 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5493 @ifset BOUT
5494
5495 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5496 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5497 output format.
5498 @end ifset
5499 @end ifset
5500
5501 @node Loc
5502 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5503 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5504 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5505 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5506 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5507 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5508 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5509 the row is added.
5510
5511 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5512
5513 @table @code
5514 @item basic_block
5515 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5516 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5517
5518 @item prologue_end
5519 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5520 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5521
5522 @item epilogue_begin
5523 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5524 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5525
5526 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5527 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5528 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5529 either 0 or 1.
5530
5531 @item isa @var{value}
5532 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5533 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5534
5535 @item discriminator @var{value}
5536 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5537 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5538
5539 @end table
5540
5541 @node Loc_mark_labels
5542 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5543 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5544 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5545 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5546 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5547 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5548 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5549 this function respectively.
5550
5551 @ifset ELF
5552 @node Local
5553 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5554
5555 @cindex @code{local} directive
5556 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5557 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5558 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5559 they will be created.
5560
5561 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5562 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5563 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5564 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5565 @end ifset
5566
5567 @node Long
5568 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5569
5570 @cindex @code{long} directive
5571 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5572
5573 @ignore
5574 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5575 @c what it really ought to do
5576 @node Lsym
5577 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5578
5579 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5580 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5581 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5582 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5583 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5584 the same as the expression value:
5585 @smallexample
5586 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5587 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5588 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5589 @end smallexample
5590 @noindent
5591 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5592 @end ignore
5593
5594 @node Macro
5595 @section @code{.macro}
5596
5597 @cindex macros
5598 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5599 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5600 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5601
5602 @example
5603 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5604 .long \from
5605 .if \to-\from
5606 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5607 .endif
5608 .endm
5609 @end example
5610
5611 @noindent
5612 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5613
5614 @example
5615 .long 0
5616 .long 1
5617 .long 2
5618 .long 3
5619 .long 4
5620 .long 5
5621 @end example
5622
5623 @ftable @code
5624 @item .macro @var{macname}
5625 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5626 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5627 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5628 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5629 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5630 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5631 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5632 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5633 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5634 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5635 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5636 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5637
5638 @table @code
5639 @item .macro comm
5640 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5641 arguments.
5642
5643 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5644 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5645 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5646 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5647 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5648
5649 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5650 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5651 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5652 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5653 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5654 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5655 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5656 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5657
5658 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5659 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5660 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5661 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5662 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5663
5664 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5665 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5666 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5667
5668 @end table
5669
5670 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5671 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5672 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5673 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5674 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5675 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5676 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5677 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5678 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5679 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5680 this macro definition:
5681
5682 @example
5683 .macro label l
5684 \l:
5685 .endm
5686 @end example
5687
5688 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5689 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5690 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5691 identifier.
5692
5693 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5694 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5695 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5696 length specifier like this:
5697
5698 @example
5699 .macro opcode base length
5700 \base.\length
5701 .endm
5702 @end example
5703
5704 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5705 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5706 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5707
5708 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5709
5710 @table @code
5711 @item Insert white space
5712 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5713 solution. eg:
5714
5715 @example
5716 .macro label l
5717 \l :
5718 .endm
5719 @end example
5720
5721 @item Use @samp{\()}
5722 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5723 the following text. eg:
5724
5725 @example
5726 .macro opcode base length
5727 \base\().\length
5728 .endm
5729 @end example
5730
5731 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5732 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5733 used as a separator. eg:
5734
5735 @example
5736 .altmacro
5737 .macro label l
5738 l&:
5739 .endm
5740 @end example
5741 @end table
5742
5743 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5744 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5745 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5746
5747 @item .endm
5748 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5749 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5750
5751 @item .exitm
5752 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5753 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5754
5755 @cindex number of macros executed
5756 @cindex macros, count executed
5757 @item \@@
5758 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5759 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5760 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5761
5762 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5763 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5764 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5765 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5766 @end ftable
5767
5768 @node MRI
5769 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5770
5771 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5772 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5773 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5774 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5775 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5776 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5777
5778 @node Noaltmacro
5779 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5780 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5781
5782 @node Nolist
5783 @section @code{.nolist}
5784
5785 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5786 @cindex listing control, turning off
5787 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5788 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5789 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5790 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5791 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5792
5793 @node Octa
5794 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5795
5796 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5797 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5798 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5799 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5800 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5801 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5802
5803 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5804 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5805
5806 @node Offset
5807 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5808
5809 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5810 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5811 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5812 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5813 directive.
5814
5815 @node Org
5816 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5817
5818 @cindex @code{org} directive
5819 @cindex location counter, advancing
5820 @cindex advancing location counter
5821 @cindex current address, advancing
5822 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5823 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5824 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5825 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5826 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5827 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5828 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5829 is the same as the current subsection.
5830
5831 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5832 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5833 backwards.
5834
5835 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5836 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5837 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5838 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5839 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5840 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5841
5842 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5843 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5844 people's assemblers.
5845
5846 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5847 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5848 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5849 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5850
5851 @node P2align
5852 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5853
5854 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5855 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5856 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5857 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5858 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5859 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5860 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5861 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5862
5863 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5864 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5865 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5866 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5867 with no-op instructions.
5868
5869 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5870 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5871 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5872 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5873 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5874 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5875 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5876
5877 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5878 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5879 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5880 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5881 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5882 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5883 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5884 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5885 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5886 undefined.
5887
5888 @ifset ELF
5889 @node PopSection
5890 @section @code{.popsection}
5891
5892 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5893 @cindex Section Stack
5894 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5895 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5896 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5897 (@pxref{Previous}).
5898
5899 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5900 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5901 stack.
5902 @end ifset
5903
5904 @ifset ELF
5905 @node Previous
5906 @section @code{.previous}
5907
5908 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5909 @cindex Section Stack
5910 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5911 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5912 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5913 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5914
5915 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5916 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5917 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5918 subsections). For example:
5919
5920 @smallexample
5921 .section A
5922 .subsection 1
5923 .word 0x1234
5924 .subsection 2
5925 .word 0x5678
5926 .previous
5927 .word 0x9abc
5928 @end smallexample
5929
5930 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5931 section A. Whilst:
5932
5933 @smallexample
5934 .section A
5935 .subsection 1
5936 # Now in section A subsection 1
5937 .word 0x1234
5938 .section B
5939 .subsection 0
5940 # Now in section B subsection 0
5941 .word 0x5678
5942 .subsection 1
5943 # Now in section B subsection 1
5944 .word 0x9abc
5945 .previous
5946 # Now in section B subsection 0
5947 .word 0xdef0
5948 @end smallexample
5949
5950 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5951 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5952
5953 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5954 the top section on the section stack.
5955 @end ifset
5956
5957 @node Print
5958 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5959
5960 @cindex @code{print} directive
5961 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5962 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5963
5964 @ifset ELF
5965 @node Protected
5966 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5967
5968 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5969 @cindex visibility
5970 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5971 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5972
5973 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5974 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5975 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5976 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5977 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5978 this.
5979 @end ifset
5980
5981 @node Psize
5982 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5983
5984 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5985 @cindex listing control: paper size
5986 @cindex paper size, for listings
5987 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5988 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5989
5990 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5991 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5992 default width is 200 columns.
5993
5994 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5995 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5996 @code{.eject}).
5997
5998 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5999 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6000
6001 @node Purgem
6002 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6003
6004 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6005 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6006 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6007
6008 @ifset ELF
6009 @node PushSection
6010 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6011
6012 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6013 @cindex Section Stack
6014 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6015 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6016 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6017 (@pxref{Previous}).
6018
6019 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6020 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6021 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6022 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6023 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6024 @end ifset
6025
6026 @node Quad
6027 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6028
6029 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6030 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6031 each bignum, it emits
6032 @ifclear bignum-16
6033 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6034 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6035 @cindex eight-byte integer
6036 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6037
6038 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6039 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6040 @end ifclear
6041 @ifset bignum-16
6042 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6043 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6044 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6045 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6046 @end ifset
6047
6048 @node Reloc
6049 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6050
6051 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6052 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6053 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6054 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6055 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6056 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6057 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6058 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6059 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6060 section.
6061
6062 @node Rept
6063 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6064
6065 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6066 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6067 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6068
6069 For example, assembling
6070
6071 @example
6072 .rept 3
6073 .long 0
6074 .endr
6075 @end example
6076
6077 is equivalent to assembling
6078
6079 @example
6080 .long 0
6081 .long 0
6082 .long 0
6083 @end example
6084
6085 @node Sbttl
6086 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6087
6088 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6089 @cindex subtitles for listings
6090 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6091 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6092 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6093
6094 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6095 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6096
6097 @ifset COFF
6098 @node Scl
6099 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6100
6101 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6102 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6103 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6104 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6105 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6106 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6107 symbolic debugging information.
6108 @ifset BOUT
6109
6110 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6111 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6112 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6113 @end ifset
6114 @end ifset
6115
6116 @ifset COFF-ELF
6117 @node Section
6118 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6119
6120 @cindex named section
6121 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6122 named @var{name}.
6123
6124 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6125 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6126 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6127
6128 @ifset COFF
6129 @ifset ELF
6130 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6131 @subheading COFF Version
6132 @end ifset
6133
6134 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6135 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6136 ways:
6137
6138 @smallexample
6139 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6140 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6141 @end smallexample
6142
6143 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6144 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6145 @table @code
6146 @item b
6147 bss section (uninitialized data)
6148 @item n
6149 section is not loaded
6150 @item w
6151 writable section
6152 @item d
6153 data section
6154 @item e
6155 exclude section from linking
6156 @item r
6157 read-only section
6158 @item x
6159 executable section
6160 @item s
6161 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6162 @item a
6163 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6164 @item y
6165 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6166 @item 0-9
6167 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6168 @end table
6169
6170 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6171 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6172 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6173 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6174 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6175
6176 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6177 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6178 @end ifset
6179
6180 @ifset ELF
6181 @ifset COFF
6182 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6183 @subheading ELF Version
6184 @end ifset
6185
6186 @cindex Section Stack
6187 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6188 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6189 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6190 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6191
6192 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6193 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6194
6195 @smallexample
6196 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6197 @end smallexample
6198
6199 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6200 combination of the following characters:
6201 @table @code
6202 @item a
6203 section is allocatable
6204 @item e
6205 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6206 @item w
6207 section is writable
6208 @item x
6209 section is executable
6210 @item M
6211 section is mergeable
6212 @item S
6213 section contains zero terminated strings
6214 @item G
6215 section is a member of a section group
6216 @item T
6217 section is used for thread-local-storage
6218 @item ?
6219 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6220 @end table
6221
6222 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6223 @table @code
6224 @item @@progbits
6225 section contains data
6226 @item @@nobits
6227 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6228 @item @@note
6229 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6230 @item @@init_array
6231 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6232 @item @@fini_array
6233 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6234 @item @@preinit_array
6235 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6236 @end table
6237
6238 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6239
6240 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6241 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6242 @code{%} character.
6243
6244 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6245 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6246
6247 @smallexample
6248 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6249 @end smallexample
6250
6251 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6252 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6253 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6254 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6255 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6256 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6257 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6258 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6259 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6260
6261 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6262 be present along with an additional field like this:
6263
6264 @smallexample
6265 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6266 @end smallexample
6267
6268 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6269 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6270 @table @code
6271 @item comdat
6272 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6273 @item .gnu.linkonce
6274 an alias for comdat
6275 @end table
6276
6277 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6278 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6279
6280 @smallexample
6281 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6282 @end smallexample
6283
6284 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6285 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6286 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6287 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6288 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6289 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6290
6291 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6292 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6293 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6294 executable. The section will contain data.
6295
6296 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6297 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6298
6299 @smallexample
6300 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6301 @end smallexample
6302
6303 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6304 separated flags:
6305 @table @code
6306 @item #alloc
6307 section is allocatable
6308 @item #write
6309 section is writable
6310 @item #execinstr
6311 section is executable
6312 @item #exclude
6313 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6314 @item #tls
6315 section is used for thread local storage
6316 @end table
6317
6318 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6319 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6320 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6321 work.
6322 @end ifset
6323 @end ifset
6324
6325 @node Set
6326 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6327
6328 @cindex @code{set} directive
6329 @cindex symbol value, setting
6330 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6331 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6332 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6333 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6334
6335 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6336
6337 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6338 file is the last value stored into it.
6339
6340 @ifset Z80
6341 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6342 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6343 @end ifset
6344
6345 @node Short
6346 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6347
6348 @cindex @code{short} directive
6349 @ifset GENERIC
6350 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6351 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6352
6353 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6354 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6355 @end ifset
6356 @ifclear GENERIC
6357 @ifset W16
6358 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6359 @end ifset
6360 @ifset W32
6361 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6362 a 16 bit number for each.
6363 @end ifset
6364 @end ifclear
6365
6366 @node Single
6367 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6368
6369 @cindex @code{single} directive
6370 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6371 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6372 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6373 @ifset GENERIC
6374 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6375 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6376 @end ifset
6377 @ifclear GENERIC
6378 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6379 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6380 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6381 @end ifset
6382 @end ifclear
6383
6384 @ifset COFF-ELF
6385 @node Size
6386 @section @code{.size}
6387
6388 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6389
6390 @ifset COFF
6391 @ifset ELF
6392 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6393 @subheading COFF Version
6394 @end ifset
6395
6396 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6397 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6398 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6399
6400 @smallexample
6401 .size @var{expression}
6402 @end smallexample
6403
6404 @ifset BOUT
6405 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6406 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6407 ignores it.
6408 @end ifset
6409 @end ifset
6410
6411 @ifset ELF
6412 @ifset COFF
6413 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6414 @subheading ELF Version
6415 @end ifset
6416
6417 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6418 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6419
6420 @smallexample
6421 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6422 @end smallexample
6423
6424 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6425 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6426 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6427 symbols.
6428 @end ifset
6429 @end ifset
6430
6431 @ifclear no-space-dir
6432 @node Skip
6433 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6434
6435 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6436 @cindex filling memory
6437 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6438 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6439 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6440 @samp{.space}.
6441 @end ifclear
6442
6443 @node Sleb128
6444 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6445
6446 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6447 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6448 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6449 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6450
6451 @ifclear no-space-dir
6452 @node Space
6453 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6454
6455 @cindex @code{space} directive
6456 @cindex filling memory
6457 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6458 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6459 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6460 as @samp{.skip}.
6461
6462 @ifset HPPA
6463 @quotation
6464 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6465 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6466 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6467 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6468 for a summary.
6469 @end quotation
6470 @end ifset
6471 @end ifclear
6472
6473 @ifset have-stabs
6474 @node Stab
6475 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6476
6477 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6478 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6479 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6480 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6481 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6482 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6483 Up to five fields are required:
6484
6485 @table @var
6486 @item string
6487 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6488 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6489 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6490 using this field.
6491
6492 @item type
6493 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6494 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6495 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6496
6497 @item other
6498 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6499 low 8 bits of this expression.
6500
6501 @item desc
6502 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6503 bits of this expression.
6504
6505 @item value
6506 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6507 @end table
6508
6509 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6510 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6511 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6512 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6513
6514 @table @code
6515 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6516 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6517
6518 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6519 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6520 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6521 strings.
6522
6523 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6524 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6525 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6526 assembled.
6527
6528 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6529 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6530 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6531
6532 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6533 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6534 All five fields are specified.
6535 @end table
6536 @end ifset
6537 @c end have-stabs
6538
6539 @node String
6540 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6541 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6542
6543 @cindex string, copying to object file
6544 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6545 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6546 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6547 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6548 @cindex @code{string} directive
6549 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6550 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6551 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6552 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6553
6554 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6555 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6556 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6557 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6558
6559 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6560 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6561 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6562 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6563
6564 Example:
6565 @smallexample
6566 .string32 "BYE"
6567 expands to:
6568 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6569 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6570 @end smallexample
6571
6572
6573 @node Struct
6574 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6575
6576 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6577 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6578 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6579 @smallexample
6580 .struct 0
6581 field1:
6582 .struct field1 + 4
6583 field2:
6584 .struct field2 + 4
6585 field3:
6586 @end smallexample
6587 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6588 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6589 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6590 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6591 before further assembly.
6592
6593 @ifset ELF
6594 @node SubSection
6595 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6596
6597 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6598 @cindex Section Stack
6599 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6600 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6601 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6602 (@pxref{Previous}).
6603
6604 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6605 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6606 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6607 @end ifset
6608
6609 @ifset ELF
6610 @node Symver
6611 @section @code{.symver}
6612 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6613 @cindex symbol versioning
6614 @cindex versions of symbols
6615 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6616 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6617 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6618 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6619 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6620 shared library.
6621
6622 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6623 @smallexample
6624 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6625 @end smallexample
6626 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6627 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6628 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6629 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6630 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6631 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6632 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6633 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6634 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6635 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6636 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6637 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6638 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6639 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6640
6641 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6642 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6643 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6644 symbol table.
6645
6646 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6647 @smallexample
6648 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6649 @end smallexample
6650 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6651 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6652 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6653 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6654
6655 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6656 @smallexample
6657 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6658 @end smallexample
6659 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6660 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6661 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6662 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6663 @end ifset
6664
6665 @ifset COFF
6666 @node Tag
6667 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6668
6669 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6670 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6671 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6672 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6673 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6674 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6675 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6676 @ifset BOUT
6677
6678 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6679 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6680 ignores it.
6681 @end ifset
6682 @end ifset
6683
6684 @node Text
6685 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6686
6687 @cindex @code{text} directive
6688 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6689 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6690 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6691 is used.
6692
6693 @node Title
6694 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6695
6696 @cindex @code{title} directive
6697 @cindex listing control: title line
6698 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6699 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6700
6701 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6702 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6703
6704 @ifset COFF-ELF
6705 @node Type
6706 @section @code{.type}
6707
6708 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6709
6710 @ifset COFF
6711 @ifset ELF
6712 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6713 @subheading COFF Version
6714 @end ifset
6715
6716 @cindex COFF symbol type
6717 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6718 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6719 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6720 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6721
6722 @smallexample
6723 .type @var{int}
6724 @end smallexample
6725
6726 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6727 entry.
6728
6729 @ifset BOUT
6730 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6731 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6732 directive but ignores it.
6733 @end ifset
6734 @end ifset
6735
6736 @ifset ELF
6737 @ifset COFF
6738 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6739 @subheading ELF Version
6740 @end ifset
6741
6742 @cindex ELF symbol type
6743 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6744 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6745 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6746
6747 @smallexample
6748 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6749 @end smallexample
6750
6751 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6752 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6753 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6754 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6755
6756 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6757 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6758 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6759 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6760 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6761 assemblers.
6762
6763 The syntaxes supported are:
6764
6765 @smallexample
6766 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6767 .type <name>,#<type>
6768 .type <name>,@@<type>
6769 .type <name>,%<type>
6770 .type <name>,"<type>"
6771 @end smallexample
6772
6773 The types supported are:
6774
6775 @table @gcctabopt
6776 @item STT_FUNC
6777 @itemx function
6778 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6779
6780 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6781 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6782 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6783 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6784
6785 @item STT_OBJECT
6786 @itemx object
6787 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6788
6789 @item STT_TLS
6790 @itemx tls_object
6791 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6792
6793 @item STT_COMMON
6794 @itemx common
6795 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6796
6797 @item STT_NOTYPE
6798 @itemx notype
6799 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6800
6801 @item gnu_unique_object
6802 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6803 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6804 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6805 systems).
6806
6807 @end table
6808
6809 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6810
6811 @end ifset
6812 @end ifset
6813
6814 @node Uleb128
6815 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6816
6817 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6818 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6819 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6820 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6821
6822 @ifset COFF
6823 @node Val
6824 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6825
6826 @cindex @code{val} directive
6827 @cindex COFF value attribute
6828 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6829 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6830 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6831 entry.
6832 @ifset BOUT
6833
6834 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6835 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6836 @end ifset
6837 @end ifset
6838
6839 @ifset ELF
6840 @node Version
6841 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6842
6843 @cindex @code{version} directive
6844 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6845 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6846 @end ifset
6847
6848 @ifset ELF
6849 @node VTableEntry
6850 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6851
6852 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6853 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6854 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6855
6856 @node VTableInherit
6857 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6858
6859 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6860 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6861 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6862 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6863 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6864 @end ifset
6865
6866 @node Warning
6867 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6868 @cindex warning directive
6869 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6870 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6871
6872 @node Weak
6873 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6874
6875 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6876 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6877 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6878
6879 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6880 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6881 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6882
6883 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6884 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6885 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6886
6887 @node Weakref
6888 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6889
6890 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6891 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6892 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6893 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6894 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6895 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6896
6897 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6898 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6899 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6900 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6901 had the references to the alias removed.
6902
6903 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6904 within the assembler.
6905
6906 @node Word
6907 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6908
6909 @cindex @code{word} directive
6910 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6911 separated by commas.
6912 @ifclear GENERIC
6913 @ifset W32
6914 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6915 @end ifset
6916 @ifset W16
6917 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6918 @end ifset
6919 @end ifclear
6920 @ifset GENERIC
6921
6922 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6923 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6924 @end ifset
6925
6926 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6927 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6928 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6929 @cindex difference tables altered
6930 @cindex altered difference tables
6931 @quotation
6932 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6933 @end quotation
6934
6935 @ifset GENERIC
6936 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6937 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6938 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6939 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6940
6941 @end ifset
6942 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6943 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6944 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6945 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6946 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6947 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6948 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6949 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6950 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6951 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6952 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6953 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6954 @code{sym2}.
6955
6956 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6957 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6958 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6959 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6960 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6961 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6962 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6963
6964 @ifset INTERNALS
6965 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6966 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6967 assembly language programmers.
6968 @end ifset
6969 @end ifset
6970 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6971
6972 @node Deprecated
6973 @section Deprecated Directives
6974
6975 @cindex deprecated directives
6976 @cindex obsolescent directives
6977 One day these directives won't work.
6978 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6979 @table @t
6980 @item .abort
6981 @item .line
6982 @end table
6983
6984 @ifset ELF
6985 @node Object Attributes
6986 @chapter Object Attributes
6987 @cindex object attributes
6988
6989 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6990 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6991 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6992 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6993 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6994 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6995 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6996 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6997 newer generation at run-time.
6998
6999 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7000 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7001 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7002 correctly.
7003
7004 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7005 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7006 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7007 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7008 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7009 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7010
7011 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7012 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7013
7014 @menu
7015 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7016 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7017 @end menu
7018
7019 @node GNU Object Attributes
7020 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7021
7022 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7023 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7024
7025 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7026 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7027 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7028 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7029 architecture-dependent ones.
7030
7031 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7032
7033 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7034
7035 @table @r
7036 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7037 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7038 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7039 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7040 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7041 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7042 @end table
7043
7044 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7045
7046 @table @r
7047 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7048 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7049
7050 @itemize @bullet
7051 @item
7052 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7053 @item
7054 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7055 double-precision FPU.
7056 @item
7057 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7058 @item
7059 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7060 @item
7061 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7062 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7063 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7064 @item
7065 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7066 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7067 general-purpose registers.
7068 @item
7069 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7070 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7071 @item
7072 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7073 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7074 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7075 @end itemize
7076 @end table
7077
7078 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7079
7080 @table @r
7081 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7082 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7083
7084 @itemize @bullet
7085 @item
7086 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7087 @item
7088 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7089 @item
7090 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7091 @item
7092 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7093 @end itemize
7094
7095 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7096 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7097
7098 @itemize @bullet
7099 @item
7100 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7101 @item
7102 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7103 @item
7104 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7105 @item
7106 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7107 @end itemize
7108 @end table
7109
7110 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7111 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7112
7113 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7114 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7115 mailing list.
7116
7117 @itemize @bullet
7118 @item
7119 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7120 @item
7121 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7122 @item
7123 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7124 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7125 @item
7126 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7127 @item
7128 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7129 @item
7130 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7131 @end itemize
7132
7133 @end ifset
7134
7135 @ifset GENERIC
7136 @node Machine Dependencies
7137 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7138
7139 @cindex machine dependencies
7140 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7141 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7142 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7143 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7144 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7145 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7146 optimization.
7147
7148 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7149 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7150 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7151
7152 @menu
7153 @ifset AARCH64
7154 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7155 @end ifset
7156 @ifset ALPHA
7157 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7158 @end ifset
7159 @ifset ARC
7160 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7161 @end ifset
7162 @ifset ARM
7163 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7164 @end ifset
7165 @ifset AVR
7166 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7167 @end ifset
7168 @ifset Blackfin
7169 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7170 @end ifset
7171 @ifset CR16
7172 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7173 @end ifset
7174 @ifset CRIS
7175 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7176 @end ifset
7177 @ifset D10V
7178 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7179 @end ifset
7180 @ifset D30V
7181 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7182 @end ifset
7183 @ifset EPIPHANY
7184 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7185 @end ifset
7186 @ifset H8/300
7187 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7188 @end ifset
7189 @ifset HPPA
7190 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7191 @end ifset
7192 @ifset I370
7193 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7194 @end ifset
7195 @ifset I80386
7196 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7197 @end ifset
7198 @ifset I860
7199 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7200 @end ifset
7201 @ifset I960
7202 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7203 @end ifset
7204 @ifset IA64
7205 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7206 @end ifset
7207 @ifset IP2K
7208 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7209 @end ifset
7210 @ifset LM32
7211 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7212 @end ifset
7213 @ifset M32C
7214 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7215 @end ifset
7216 @ifset M32R
7217 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7218 @end ifset
7219 @ifset M680X0
7220 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7221 @end ifset
7222 @ifset M68HC11
7223 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7224 @end ifset
7225 @ifset METAG
7226 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7227 @end ifset
7228 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7229 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7230 @end ifset
7231 @ifset MIPS
7232 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7233 @end ifset
7234 @ifset MMIX
7235 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7236 @end ifset
7237 @ifset MSP430
7238 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7239 @end ifset
7240 @ifset NDS32
7241 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7242 @end ifset
7243 @ifset NIOSII
7244 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7245 @end ifset
7246 @ifset NS32K
7247 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7248 @end ifset
7249 @ifset SH
7250 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7251 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7252 @end ifset
7253 @ifset PDP11
7254 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7255 @end ifset
7256 @ifset PJ
7257 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7258 @end ifset
7259 @ifset PPC
7260 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7261 @end ifset
7262 @ifset RL78
7263 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7264 @end ifset
7265 @ifset RX
7266 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7267 @end ifset
7268 @ifset S390
7269 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7270 @end ifset
7271 @ifset SCORE
7272 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7273 @end ifset
7274 @ifset SPARC
7275 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7276 @end ifset
7277 @ifset TIC54X
7278 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7279 @end ifset
7280 @ifset TIC6X
7281 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7282 @end ifset
7283 @ifset TILEGX
7284 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7285 @end ifset
7286 @ifset TILEPRO
7287 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7288 @end ifset
7289 @ifset V850
7290 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7291 @end ifset
7292 @ifset VAX
7293 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7294 @end ifset
7295 @ifset VISIUM
7296 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7297 @end ifset
7298 @ifset XGATE
7299 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7300 @end ifset
7301 @ifset XSTORMY16
7302 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7303 @end ifset
7304 @ifset XTENSA
7305 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7306 @end ifset
7307 @ifset Z80
7308 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7309 @end ifset
7310 @ifset Z8000
7311 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7312 @end ifset
7313 @end menu
7314
7315 @lowersections
7316 @end ifset
7317
7318 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7319 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7320 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7321 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7322 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7323 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7324 @c in both conditional blocks.
7325
7326 @ifset AARCH64
7327 @include c-aarch64.texi
7328 @end ifset
7329
7330 @ifset ALPHA
7331 @include c-alpha.texi
7332 @end ifset
7333
7334 @ifset ARC
7335 @include c-arc.texi
7336 @end ifset
7337
7338 @ifset ARM
7339 @include c-arm.texi
7340 @end ifset
7341
7342 @ifset AVR
7343 @include c-avr.texi
7344 @end ifset
7345
7346 @ifset Blackfin
7347 @include c-bfin.texi
7348 @end ifset
7349
7350 @ifset CR16
7351 @include c-cr16.texi
7352 @end ifset
7353
7354 @ifset CRIS
7355 @include c-cris.texi
7356 @end ifset
7357
7358 @ifset Renesas-all
7359 @ifclear GENERIC
7360 @node Machine Dependencies
7361 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7362
7363 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7364 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7365 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7366 family.
7367
7368 @menu
7369 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7370 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7371 @end menu
7372 @lowersections
7373 @end ifclear
7374 @end ifset
7375
7376 @ifset D10V
7377 @include c-d10v.texi
7378 @end ifset
7379
7380 @ifset D30V
7381 @include c-d30v.texi
7382 @end ifset
7383
7384 @ifset EPIPHANY
7385 @include c-epiphany.texi
7386 @end ifset
7387
7388 @ifset H8/300
7389 @include c-h8300.texi
7390 @end ifset
7391
7392 @ifset HPPA
7393 @include c-hppa.texi
7394 @end ifset
7395
7396 @ifset I370
7397 @include c-i370.texi
7398 @end ifset
7399
7400 @ifset I80386
7401 @include c-i386.texi
7402 @end ifset
7403
7404 @ifset I860
7405 @include c-i860.texi
7406 @end ifset
7407
7408 @ifset I960
7409 @include c-i960.texi
7410 @end ifset
7411
7412 @ifset IA64
7413 @include c-ia64.texi
7414 @end ifset
7415
7416 @ifset IP2K
7417 @include c-ip2k.texi
7418 @end ifset
7419
7420 @ifset LM32
7421 @include c-lm32.texi
7422 @end ifset
7423
7424 @ifset M32C
7425 @include c-m32c.texi
7426 @end ifset
7427
7428 @ifset M32R
7429 @include c-m32r.texi
7430 @end ifset
7431
7432 @ifset M680X0
7433 @include c-m68k.texi
7434 @end ifset
7435
7436 @ifset M68HC11
7437 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7438 @end ifset
7439
7440 @ifset METAG
7441 @include c-metag.texi
7442 @end ifset
7443
7444 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7445 @include c-microblaze.texi
7446 @end ifset
7447
7448 @ifset MIPS
7449 @include c-mips.texi
7450 @end ifset
7451
7452 @ifset MMIX
7453 @include c-mmix.texi
7454 @end ifset
7455
7456 @ifset MSP430
7457 @include c-msp430.texi
7458 @end ifset
7459
7460 @ifset NDS32
7461 @include c-nds32.texi
7462 @end ifset
7463
7464 @ifset NIOSII
7465 @include c-nios2.texi
7466 @end ifset
7467
7468 @ifset NS32K
7469 @include c-ns32k.texi
7470 @end ifset
7471
7472 @ifset PDP11
7473 @include c-pdp11.texi
7474 @end ifset
7475
7476 @ifset PJ
7477 @include c-pj.texi
7478 @end ifset
7479
7480 @ifset PPC
7481 @include c-ppc.texi
7482 @end ifset
7483
7484 @ifset RL78
7485 @include c-rl78.texi
7486 @end ifset
7487
7488 @ifset RX
7489 @include c-rx.texi
7490 @end ifset
7491
7492 @ifset S390
7493 @include c-s390.texi
7494 @end ifset
7495
7496 @ifset SCORE
7497 @include c-score.texi
7498 @end ifset
7499
7500 @ifset SH
7501 @include c-sh.texi
7502 @include c-sh64.texi
7503 @end ifset
7504
7505 @ifset SPARC
7506 @include c-sparc.texi
7507 @end ifset
7508
7509 @ifset TIC54X
7510 @include c-tic54x.texi
7511 @end ifset
7512
7513 @ifset TIC6X
7514 @include c-tic6x.texi
7515 @end ifset
7516
7517 @ifset TILEGX
7518 @include c-tilegx.texi
7519 @end ifset
7520
7521 @ifset TILEPRO
7522 @include c-tilepro.texi
7523 @end ifset
7524
7525 @ifset V850
7526 @include c-v850.texi
7527 @end ifset
7528
7529 @ifset VAX
7530 @include c-vax.texi
7531 @end ifset
7532
7533 @ifset VISIUM
7534 @include c-visium.texi
7535 @end ifset
7536
7537 @ifset XGATE
7538 @include c-xgate.texi
7539 @end ifset
7540
7541 @ifset XSTORMY16
7542 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7543 @end ifset
7544
7545 @ifset XTENSA
7546 @include c-xtensa.texi
7547 @end ifset
7548
7549 @ifset Z80
7550 @include c-z80.texi
7551 @end ifset
7552
7553 @ifset Z8000
7554 @include c-z8k.texi
7555 @end ifset
7556
7557 @ifset GENERIC
7558 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7559 @raisesections
7560 @end ifset
7561
7562 @node Reporting Bugs
7563 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7564 @cindex bugs in assembler
7565 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7566
7567 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7568
7569 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7570 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7571 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7572 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7573
7574 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7575 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7576
7577 @menu
7578 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7579 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7580 @end menu
7581
7582 @node Bug Criteria
7583 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7584 @cindex bug criteria
7585
7586 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7587
7588 @itemize @bullet
7589 @cindex fatal signal
7590 @cindex assembler crash
7591 @cindex crash of assembler
7592 @item
7593 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7594 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7595
7596 @cindex error on valid input
7597 @item
7598 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7599
7600 @cindex invalid input
7601 @item
7602 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7603 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7604 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7605
7606 @item
7607 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7608 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7609 @end itemize
7610
7611 @node Bug Reporting
7612 @section How to Report Bugs
7613 @cindex bug reports
7614 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7615
7616 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7617 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7618 contact that organization first.
7619
7620 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7621 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7622 distribution.
7623
7624 @ifset BUGURL
7625 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7626 to @value{BUGURL}.
7627 @end ifset
7628
7629 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7630 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7631 fact or leave it out, state it!
7632
7633 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7634 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7635 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7636 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7637 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7638 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7639 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7640 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7641 and the most helpful.
7642
7643 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7644 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7645 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7646
7647 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7648 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7649 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7650 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7651
7652 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7653
7654 @itemize @bullet
7655 @item
7656 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7657 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7658
7659 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7660 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7661
7662 @item
7663 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7664
7665 @item
7666 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7667 version number.
7668
7669 @item
7670 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7671 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7672
7673 @item
7674 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7675 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7676 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7677
7678 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7679 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7680
7681 @item
7682 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7683 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7684 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7685 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7686 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7687 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7688 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7689
7690 @item
7691 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7692 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7693
7694 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7695 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7696 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7697 make a mistake.
7698
7699 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7700 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7701 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7702 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7703 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7704 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7705 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7706 observations.
7707
7708 @item
7709 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7710 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7711 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7712 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7713 by line number.
7714
7715 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7716 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7717 @end itemize
7718
7719 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7720
7721 @itemize @bullet
7722 @item
7723 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7724
7725 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7726 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7727 changes will not affect it.
7728
7729 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7730 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7731 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7732 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7733
7734 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7735 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7736 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7737 less time, and so on.
7738
7739 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7740 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7741
7742 @item
7743 A patch for the bug.
7744
7745 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7746 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7747 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7748 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7749
7750 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7751 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7752 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7753 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7754
7755 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7756 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7757 help us to understand.
7758
7759 @item
7760 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7761
7762 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7763 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7764 @end itemize
7765
7766 @node Acknowledgements
7767 @chapter Acknowledgements
7768
7769 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7770 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7771 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7772 @c (October 2012),
7773 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7774
7775 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7776 more details?}
7777
7778 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7779 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7780 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7781
7782 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7783 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7784 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7785 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7786 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7787 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7788 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7789 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7790 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7791 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7792
7793 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7794 in format-specific I/O modules.
7795
7796 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7797 has done much work with it since.
7798
7799 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7800
7801 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7802
7803 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7804 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7805
7806 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7807 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7808 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7809 support a.out format.
7810
7811 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7812 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7813 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7814 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7815 targets.
7816
7817 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7818 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7819 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7820 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7821 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7822 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7823 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7824
7825 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7826 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7827 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7828 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7829
7830 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7831
7832 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7833
7834 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7835 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7836 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7837 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7838
7839 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7840 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7841 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7842 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7843 and some initial 64-bit support).
7844
7845 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7846
7847 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7848 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7849
7850 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7851 flavors.
7852
7853 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7854 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7855
7856 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7857 configuration enhancements.
7858
7859 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7860
7861 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7862 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7863 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7864 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7865
7866 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7867 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7868 @include fdl.texi
7869
7870 @node AS Index
7871 @unnumbered AS Index
7872
7873 @printindex cp
7874
7875 @bye
7876 @c Local Variables:
7877 @c fill-column: 79
7878 @c End:
This page took 0.307012 seconds and 3 git commands to generate.